CONTROLS for Your BMW M2 2 Door Second Generation (2022-2025)

Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
Power windows 89  
Unlocking  
Locking  
2
3
Exterior mirror adjustment button 105  
Seating comfort features  
Memory function 107  
5
Lights  
Light switch 153  
4
Central locking system 84  
Exterior lighting off  
Daytime driving lights 156  
32  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Parking lights 154  
Depending on the equipment:  
Active Cruise Control on/off 202  
Automatic headlight control 154  
Adaptive lighting functions 156  
Cruise Control: store the speed  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept  
suggested speed 208  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
152  
Continuing cruise control  
Low-beam headlights 154  
Interrupting Cruise Control  
Instrument lighting 157  
Active Cruise Control: increase  
distance  
Right roadside parking light 154  
Left roadside parking light 154  
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis-  
tance  
Cruise Control rocker switch  
6
Turn signal lever  
Turn signal 151  
10 Instrument cluster 132  
11 Steering wheel buttons, right  
Displaying menu bar in instru-  
High-beam headlights, head-  
light flasher 151  
ment cluster 132  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
152  
Volume, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
Trip data 145  
G-Meter 147  
Voice activation system 54  
7
Shift paddles 119  
Selecting menu contents in instru-  
ment cluster 132  
8
M1 183  
Changing the station/track, see  
Owner's Manual for Navigation,  
Entertainment, Communication 6  
9
Steering wheel buttons, left  
Manual Speed Limiter 197  
Telephone, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
Depending on the equipment:  
Cruise Control on/off 199  
Knurled wheel for selecting con-  
figuration menus for instrument  
cluster and Head-up display 132  
Using infotainment selection lists  
in the instrument cluster 141  
33  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
12  
M2 183  
Wipers 159  
Rain sensor 159  
13 Wiper lever  
Cleaning the windshield 160  
14  
Horn, entire surface  
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 107  
16  
Unlocking the hood 289  
17  
Opening and closing cargo area  
79  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
Control display 50  
Ventilation 233  
2
34  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
3
Hazard warning system 305  
7
M MODE 185  
Climate control 226  
M Setup 183  
Defrost function 231  
Sound control 131  
Rear window defroster 232  
8
9
Turning the drive-ready state  
on/off 115  
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-  
cation 6  
Auto Start/Stop function 115  
Parking assistance systems 211  
Dynamic Stability Control 188  
Adjusting the volume  
Station/title forward  
Station/title back  
10 Manual transmission: gearshift lever 118  
4
5
6
Glove compartment 244  
Controller with buttons 50  
Parking brake 127  
M Steptronic Sport transmission: selector  
lever 119  
Automatic Hold 128  
35  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
In the vicinity of the headliner  
1
Emergency Call, SOS 307  
4
5
Reading lights 158  
Interior lights 157  
2
3
Operating the electric glass sun-  
roof 91  
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag 164  
36  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Rearview camera  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Overview  
The rearview camera is located in the handle  
strip on the rear of the vehicle.  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-  
cle:  
Functional requirement of the  
cameras  
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Rearview camera.  
Additional information:  
Front radar sensor.  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 314.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 315.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
System limits of the cameras  
The cameras may not work properly, e.g.,  
show something that is incorrect, in the follow-  
ing situations:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Cameras  
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in  
tight curves.  
Camera behind the windshield  
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,  
for instance by a fogged up windshield or  
labels.  
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.  
With open doors or open cargo area.  
When driving toward bright lights or strong  
reflections, e.g., setting sun.  
▷
When it is dark outside.  
The camera behind the windshield is located  
near the interior mirror.  
37  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The camera has overheated due to exces-  
sive temperatures and temporarily turned  
off.  
Radar sensors, side, rear  
During calibration of the camera immedi-  
ately after vehicle delivery.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
Radar sensors  
Safety information  
Warning  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the rear bumper.  
Functional requirement of the radar  
sensors  
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and  
clear.  
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the  
driver assistance systems can be impaired by  
external influences, e.g., interference. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation  
closely, be ready to take over steering and  
braking at any time, and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 314.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 315.  
System limits of the radar sensors  
The function of the radar sensors may be re-  
stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
Front radar sensor  
▷
▷
▷
In case of dirty sensors.  
In case of iced-up sensors.  
If sensors are covered such as by labels,  
films or a license-plate carrier.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.  
The front radar sensor is located in the front  
bumper.  
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow  
hills, vehicles or trailers.  
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
38  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side  
Ultrasonic sensors  
Ultrasonic sensors, front  
The ultrasonic sensors for the parking assis-  
tance systems are located on the sides of the  
front and rear bumpers.  
Functional requirement of the  
ultrasonic sensors  
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean  
and clear.  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the front bumper.  
Additional information:  
Ultrasonic sensors, rear  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 314.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 315.  
System limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in  
the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by  
stickers.  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.  
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
▷
▷
For small children and animals.  
For persons with certain clothing, for in-  
stance jacket.  
▷
▷
With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
In case of external interference with the  
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-  
39  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic  
sources.  
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-  
treme heat, or strong wind.  
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other  
vehicles.  
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
With moving objects.  
With elevated, protruding objects such as  
ledges.  
▷
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
In the case of objects with fine surfaces or  
structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.  
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.  
With small and low objects, for instance  
boxes.  
▷
▷
Low objects already displayed, for instance  
curbs, can be outside of the detection  
ranges of the sensors.  
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
▷
▷
▷
With plants and bushes.  
In automatic car washes.  
In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed  
bumps.  
▷
▷
If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.  
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
ultrasonic sensors.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
40  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Vehicle features and options  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
General information  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in  
one of the three states:  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Standby state.  
Drive-ready state.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Idle state  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Principle  
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched  
off.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
General information  
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening  
from the outside and after exiting and locking.  
Safety information  
Establishing the sleep mode  
automatically  
The sleep mode is established automatically  
such as in the following situations:  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
41  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes  
place on the vehicle.  
General information  
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than  
three months, some special measures are nec-  
essary. For more information, contact an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is  
low.  
Depending on the configuration via iDrive:  
one or both front doors will be opened after  
driving when exiting the vehicle.  
Activating/deactivating deep sleep  
mode  
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-  
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or  
when the low-beam headlights are switched  
on.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Deep sleep mode"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established  
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,  
all passengers must exit the vehicle.  
Deep sleep mode deactivates automatically  
when drive-ready state is turned on.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Access to the vehicle  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
5. "Turn off after opening door"  
Establishing the sleep mode  
manually  
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-  
pletion of trip:  
Press the button on the cargo area to access  
the vehicle while in deep sleep mode. Deep  
sleep mode remains on in this case.  
Press and hold the volume but-  
ton on the radio until all displays  
go out.  
Standby state  
Deep sleep mode  
Principle  
When standby state is switched on, most func-  
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-  
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.  
Principle  
Deep sleep mode is activated to prevent the  
vehicle battery from discharging when the ve-  
hicle is stationary for several weeks.  
General information  
The vehicle is in standby state after the front  
doors are opened from the outside.  
In deep sleep mode, the vehicle functions are  
limited to the essentials.  
42  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Manually setting to standby  
Safety information  
General information  
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-  
hicle is automatically set to idle state.  
DANGER  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is  
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-  
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain  
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.  
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation.  
Via the volume button  
Press the volume button on the  
radio. The control display and  
the instrument cluster illuminate.  
Using the Start/Stop button  
Warning  
Press the Start/Stop button.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
The control display and the instrument  
cluster illuminate.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Drive-ready state  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Principle  
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to  
starting the engine.  
NOTICE  
General information  
Repeatedly attempting to start the engine or  
repeatedly starting the vehicle in rapid suc-  
cession can cause the starter to overheat.  
This also results in unburned or inadequately  
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-  
verter to overheat. There is a risk of property  
damage. Avoid repeated starting of the vehi-  
cle, particularly repeated starting in rapid suc-  
cession.  
Some vehicle functions can only be used with  
the drive-ready state switched on.  
43  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
1. Engage selector lever position P with the  
vehicle stopped.  
General information  
Drive-ready state is turned on  
using the Start/Stop button.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The engine is switched off. The vehicle  
switches into standby state.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Manual transmission: step on the clutch  
pedal and shift to Neutral.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The ignition is activated automatically for a  
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-  
gine starts.  
Most of the indicator lights and warning lights  
on the instrument cluster illuminate for differ-  
ent lengths of time.  
Gasoline engine  
Depending on the motorization, the full drive  
power may not be available for approximately  
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this  
case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The activated drive-ready state is indicated  
in the instrument cluster, depending on the  
equipment, by the display of information re-  
quired for driving or the READY display.  
Turning off drive-ready state  
Manual transmission:  
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the  
parking brake.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The engine is switched off. The vehicle  
switches into standby state.  
3. Shift into first gear or reverse gear.  
44  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
BMW iDrive  
accident, injury, and property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Main menu  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
The main menu is divided into different areas.  
Display and operating  
concept  
Overview  
Principle  
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-  
ating concept and includes a wide range of  
functions.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions  
can be operated as follows:  
1
Menu bar  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the control display.  
2
3
4
Widgets  
Via the Controller.  
Status information  
Climate bar, A/C 226  
Via the touchpad.  
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Via the operating elements on the steering  
wheel.  
Menu bar  
Additional information:  
Apps menu  
Instrument cluster, refer to page 132.  
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A  
filter can be selected. If necessary, change the  
filter to see the apps you want.  
Safety information  
▷
"All apps": All apps and functions are dis-  
played.  
Warning  
▷
"Infotainment": Only infotainment apps are  
displayed.  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of  
45  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
"Vehicle": Only vehicle adjustment func-  
tions are displayed.  
smartphones. The widgets also serve as but-  
tons and allow jumping to the relevant menu.  
"Recently used": The most recently used  
apps are displayed.  
Status information  
General information  
Media menu  
The status field can be found in the upper area  
of the control display. Status information is dis-  
played in the form of icons. Depending on the  
equipment and national-market version, differ-  
ent icons are available.  
Access to functions of the entertainment  
system, e.g., radio stations or connection with  
external devices.  
Communication menu  
Access to the telephone and message  
function as well as the connection and man-  
agement of mobile devices such as smart-  
phones.  
Telephone status information  
Icon  
Meaning  
Active call.  
Navigation menu  
Signal strength.  
SIM card missing.  
Access to the navigation system, destina-  
tion input and traffic bulletins. Configurable  
map views and other functions such as points  
of interest.  
Entertainment status information  
Climate menu  
Icon Meaning  
USB audio.  
The Climate menu provides access to all  
climate control functions.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Smartphone audio.  
Connected Music with Spotify.  
Time shift.  
Apple CarPlay© menu  
Depending on the national-market version  
with a connected function: access to Apple  
CarPlay. Apple CarPlay enables the secure  
use of certain functions of a compatible Apple  
iPhone via iDrive.  
Wi-Fi.  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto© menu  
Depending on the national-market version  
with a connected function: access to Android  
Auto. Android Auto enables the secure use  
of certain functions of a compatible Android  
smartphone via iDrive.  
Android Auto.  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
Status information messages  
Icon Meaning  
Widgets  
Widgets show real-time information and dy-  
namic content such as current media or paired  
Number of notifications.  
Check Control message.  
46  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Icon Meaning  
Suppress private information.  
Icon  
Function  
Confirm entry.  
Do not disturb.  
Message.  
Shift the input area to the left  
or right.  
Entry comparison  
Additional information:  
When entering data from a database such as  
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed  
down for each character entered, with charac-  
ters being added as necessary.  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Other status information  
Activating/deactivating the functions  
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.  
Selecting the menu item enables or disables  
the function.  
Icon Meaning  
Sound output active.  
Sound output deactivated.  
Activation word active.  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
Destination guidance active.  
Go to quick access.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Function is activated.  
Function is deactivated.  
Enabling/disabling audible feedback  
For some functions, audio confirmation is  
given, e.g., sounds are emitted when operating  
the control display.  
Wireless charging active.  
Park Distance Control: sound active.  
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-  
vated.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Sound"  
Input and display  
Letters and numbers  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Letters and numbers can be entered using the  
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice  
control, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Quick access  
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,  
certain settings, and app recommendations.  
Icon  
Function  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Enter a blank space.  
Switching between languages.  
Use voice control.  
47  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The function will work immediately. This  
means for instance that the connection is es-  
tablished when a phone number is selected.  
Input  
Operation  
Swipe from top to bottom on the  
Show  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller up.  
Tap the icon on the status  
bar.  
Swipe from the bottom up on the  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller down.  
Deleting shortcuts  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.  
3. "Delete shortcut"  
Hide  
BMW Curved Display  
Activating/deactivating pop-ups  
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed  
automatically on the control display. Some of  
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.  
Principle  
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen  
display in the instrument panel that is curved  
towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display  
comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-  
er's side and the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Pop-ups"  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW  
Curved Display in the Care chapter.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Shortcuts  
Additional information:  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 317.  
General information  
The iDrive functions can be stored on the  
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance  
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone  
numbers and menu entries.  
Overview  
Storing a function  
1. Select the desired function.  
2. Press and hold the desired function.  
3. "Add to shortcuts"  
Shortcuts can only be created with an active  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
1
Instrument cluster 132  
Control display 49  
Executing a function  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
2
2. Tap the desired shortcut.  
48  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Switching the control display on/off  
automatically  
Control display  
The control display is turned on automatically  
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the  
control display is needed for operation.  
Principle  
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-  
trol display.  
In certain situations, the control display is  
switched off automatically, for instance if no  
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-  
eral minutes.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Switching the control display on/off  
manually  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
2. "Screen off"  
Tap the control display to turn it on again.  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
Warning  
2. "Vehicle"  
Objects in the area in front of a display can  
slip and damage the display. There is a risk  
of injury and risk of property damage. Do not  
place objects in the area in front of a display.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Control display"  
5. "Brightness at night"  
6. Make the desired setting.  
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-  
ness control may not be clearly visible.  
Overview  
System limits  
In the case of very high temperatures on the  
control display, for instance due to intense so-  
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced  
down to complete deactivation. Once the  
temperature is reduced, for instance through  
shade or air conditioning system, the normal  
functions are restored.  
Control display.  
49  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Operation  
Controller  
▷
▷
▷
Rotate the Controller to switch between  
menu options, for example.  
Principle  
The Controller can be used to select menu  
items and enter the settings. The buttons can  
be used to open the menus directly.  
Overview  
Press the Controller to select a menu  
option, for example.  
Controller  
Buttons on the Controller  
Button Function  
Call up the main menu.  
Slide the Controller in four directions to  
switch between menus, for example.  
Call up the Media/Radio menu.  
Go to Phone menu.  
Call up the navigation map.  
Call up the destination input menu  
for navigation.  
Operating via the Controller  
Go to previous menu.  
Opening the main menu  
Press the button.  
Call up the Options menu.  
The main menu is displayed.  
50  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
Selecting menu items  
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu  
item is highlighted.  
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual.  
2. Press the Controller.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as  
shortcut.  
Adjusting the main display  
The main display can be adjusted in the main  
menu.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Letters and numbers can only be entered  
when stationary.  
1.  
Press the button.  
Input  
2. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the  
main display.  
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-  
bers.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. Select the desired main display.  
2.  
: confirm entry.  
Additional information:  
Selecting a widget  
Setting the system language, refer to page 56.  
1. Use the Controller to select widgets.  
Deleting an entry  
2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the de-  
sired widget is selected.  
Icon Function  
3. Press the Controller.  
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-  
ber.  
Switching between menus  
A new display opens after a menu item is se-  
lected.  
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
▷
Slide the Controller to the left.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
▷
Press the button.  
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right  
quickly.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
1. Select the desired menu item using the  
Controller.  
2. Press and hold the Controller.  
51  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Operation  
Operation via touchpad  
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the  
upper area of the touch-  
pad.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive  
functions can be operated with the controller  
touchpad.  
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the  
score.  
lower area of the touch-  
pad.  
The touchpad is located on the Controller.  
Touch the touchpad with your fingers. Do not  
use any objects.  
Using the map  
The map in the navigation system can be  
moved via the touchpad.  
Selecting functions  
1.  
Apps menu  
Tap the map on the control display and then  
continue operation using the touchpad.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Touchpad"  
Function  
Operation  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di-  
rection.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Display menu. Tap once.  
Entering letters and numbers  
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on  
the control display.  
Using alphabetical lists  
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries  
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-  
try exists.  
▷
Always enter associated characters such as  
accents or periods so that the letter can be  
clearly recognized.  
▷
The set language determines what input  
is possible. Where necessary, enter special  
characters via the Controller.  
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.  
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed  
in the list.  
Additional information:  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 56.  
Operation via control display  
Entering special characters  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the con-  
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.  
Function  
Operation  
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the  
You can tap on menu items and widgets.  
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do  
not use any objects.  
ter.  
touchpad.  
Enter a blank  
space.  
Swipe to the right in the  
center of the touchpad.  
Opening the main menu  
Tap on the icon.  
The main menu is displayed.  
52  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting widgets  
Entering letters and numbers  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main  
menu. The adjustments can only be performed  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
Input  
1. If necessary, tap the  
display.  
icon or control  
1. If necessary,  
tap the icon.  
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.  
2. Press and hold the widget.  
3. Make the desired adjustment:  
Deleting an entry  
▷
▷
▷
Tap on the icon.  
Icon Function  
A new widget can be selected.  
Tap on the icon.  
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.  
The widget is deleted.  
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
Press and hold the widget and drag to  
the left or right.  
The widget is moved to the desired po-  
sition.  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved on the con-  
trol display.  
Sorting apps  
To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-  
sired icon and move it to the desired location.  
Function  
Operation  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate  
direction.  
Switching between menus  
A new display opens after a menu item is se-  
lected.  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out with the fin-  
gers.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
Select the arrow symbol.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.  
A letter box is displayed.  
Press and hold the desired menu item.  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as  
shortcut.  
53  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the  
ConnectedDrive Store.  
BMW Intelligent Personal  
Assistant  
Suggestions, refer to page 57.  
Principle  
Activating the voice control system  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a  
personal assistant that enables natural voice  
operation of various vehicle functions. The  
Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate  
the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions  
and automating habits.  
General information  
There are various methods for activating the  
voice control feature:  
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel briefly.  
General information  
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-  
tive.  
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-  
able depending on national-market version.  
Speaking the activation word.  
▷
The system includes special microphones  
on the driver side and the front passenger  
side.  
The microphones on the driver's or front  
passenger's side are active with the follow-  
ing voice control, depending on where the  
activation word was spoken.  
▷
▷
Say the commands and numbers fluently  
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,  
and speed.  
Then say the command. The activation word  
and the command can be spoken without  
pause in one sentence.  
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-  
ken.  
Microphone button on steering wheel  
Functional requirements  
▷
A language that is supported by the Per-  
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.  
1.  
Press button briefly.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 56.  
2. Say the command.  
Activation word  
General information  
▷
Always say commands in the configured  
system language.  
For the full range of functions, you must acti-  
vate, configure, or purchase the following func-  
tions:  
Saying the activation word will start the Per-  
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis-  
tens.  
▷
Online speech processing, refer to  
page 57.  
Preset activation word  
▷
For all settings under  
›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can  
be activated and deactivated.  
Data protection, refer to page 65.  
Activation word, refer to page 54.  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
▷
▷
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
54  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
4. "Voice control"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Wake word"  
5. "Additional speech assistants"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
7. ""Hello BMW""  
Canceling voice control  
Personal activation word  
In addition to the preset activation word, a  
personal activation word can be set up with  
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-  
sonal activation word can also be changed or  
deleted.  
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel again.  
▷
▷
▷
›Cancel‹  
Slide the Controller to the right or left.  
Press the Controller.  
The activation word should consist of multiple  
syllables to ensure good recognition.  
Possible commands  
›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary  
for the activation word and does not need to  
be spoken.  
General information  
Commands can be used to give instructions  
or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant  
providing assistance.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Wake word"  
For example, you can call contacts, navigate  
to an address, apply settings, or ask questions  
about a vehicle function. Most vehicle functions  
can be operated via voice commands, e.g., the  
Automatic Parking Assistant.  
7. "Personal wake word"  
8. "Set"  
Most content on the control display can be  
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list  
entries.  
9. "Start recording"  
Activation word from third-party providers  
Help for voice control  
Depending on national-market version, some  
third-party providers offer digital voice assis-  
tants, e.g., Amazon Alexa.  
▷
›Voice commands‹: have possible example  
commands suggested.  
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have  
information on the operating principle of the  
voice control announced.  
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-  
nected via Apple CarPlay.  
Supported voice assistants can be used with a  
connected smartphone in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
›Help‹: have tips and example commands  
for voice control announced.  
The activation word from connected third-  
party providers can be used in addition to your  
preset or personal activation word from BMW.  
Additional example commands for the cur-  
rent context are displayed in the widget of  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
55  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
is available depending on the national-market  
version. The speech recognition and quality of  
the feedback may vary.  
Sample commands  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Smith‹  
›Drive me to JFK airport‹  
Example command: ›How can the passenger  
airbag be deactivated?‹  
›Play a classical music station‹  
›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹  
›Activate the climate control‹  
›Increase the ACC distance‹  
›Sport mode‹  
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.  
When stationary, the section of the integrated  
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control  
display.  
Additional example commands can be dis-  
played on the control display.  
Settings  
1.  
Apps menu  
Setting the system language  
2. "All apps"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "Personal Assistant"  
4. "Help"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Language"  
5. "Example commands"  
Sample commands for the current context are  
displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-  
sistant widget.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the response length  
Additional information:  
You can set the Personal Assistant to use  
standard dialog or a short version. In case of  
the short version, the announcements by the  
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab-  
breviated version.  
Adjust widgets, refer to page 52.  
Menu items  
The Personal Assistant can bring up menu  
items directly. Say the menu items as they are  
displayed on the control display. You do not  
have to follow the order of the menu items  
when speaking them out loud.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
1. Activate the voice control system.  
2. ›Media‹  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Response length"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
3. ›Presets‹  
The stored stations are displayed on the  
control display.  
Speaking during voice output  
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the  
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-  
abled if requests are often canceled uninten-  
Owner's Manual via voice operation  
You can ask simple questions about vehicle  
functions and the operation of the vehicle.  
The voice activation system and the feed-  
back it provides do not replace the printed  
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function  
56  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
tionally, for instance due to background noise  
or conversations in the vehicle.  
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is  
available depending on the national-market  
version. Online speech processing is not avail-  
able in all languages.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "System settings"  
2. "Vehicle"  
4. "Voice control"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Speaking during voice output"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Online speech processing"  
Suggestions  
General information  
Configuring the visualization  
The Personal Assistant provides helpful, indi-  
vidual suggestions.  
How the Personal Assistant is visualized can  
be set.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Activating/deactivating suggestions  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Visualization"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Receive suggestions"  
Voice control from third-party  
providers  
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party  
voice control can be enabled by pressing and  
holding the microphone button on the steering  
wheel.  
Adapting suggestions  
Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by  
category or to output a signal tone.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Long press"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Online speech processing  
Online speech processing improves the quality  
of the speech recognition and search results  
for points of interest. To use the functions,  
data is transmitted to a service provider via an  
encrypted connection and stored locally there.  
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-  
ance until the desired volume is set.  
The volume remains constant even if the vol-  
ume of other audio sources is changed.  
57  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa  
app to set it up in the vehicle.  
Using the voice activation of the  
smartphone  
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-  
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice  
control.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Amazon Alexa"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
The device must be connected via Apple Car-  
Play or Android Auto.  
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the  
vehicle as follows:  
1. Press and hold the  
button on the  
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-  
sired command.  
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.  
The voice activation of the smartphone is  
activated.  
Information about the active function is dis-  
played on the control display. If the function  
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as  
necessary.  
If activation is successful, a confirmation  
appears on the control display.  
Automating routines  
2. Press and hold the  
button on the  
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the  
smartphone.  
General information  
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,  
for instance the automatic opening of windows  
in the same place. Rules are created for this  
purpose, which can be activated and deacti-  
vated at any time.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration  
Principle  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-  
pending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant  
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-  
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For  
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-  
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-  
cle.  
Activating/deactivating routines  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Automate habits"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
System limits  
Functional requirements  
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-  
tion about vehicle functions that may not be  
installed in the vehicle.  
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.  
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.  
This also applies to safety functions and  
systems.  
Activating Amazon Alexa Car  
Integration  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in  
the vehicle and My BMW app if necessary.  
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may  
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-  
dows closed.  
58  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
Noises from the front passenger or occu-  
pants can impair the system. Avoid making  
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.  
The following information sources can also be  
used:  
▷
▷
Driver’s Guide app.  
Driver’s Guide Web.  
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-  
lems with the speech recognition feature.  
A poor data connection affects the re-  
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and  
search function.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Connecting mobile devices  
to the vehicle  
Principle  
Various connection modes are available for us-  
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-  
tion mode to select depends on the mobile de-  
vice and desired function.  
Overview  
General information  
The following overview shows possible func-  
tions and suitable connection modes for them.  
The range of functions depends on the vehicle  
equipment and the mobile device.  
Detailed information on the functions and con-  
nection modes is provided in the following me-  
dia from the Owner's Manual under the speci-  
fied keyword:  
▷
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.  
Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,  
communication and entertainment.  
Function  
Connection mode  
Icon on the con-  
trol display  
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.  
tem.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Using phone functions via iDrive.  
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.  
Playing music from a mobile device.  
Keyword: audio.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Calling without a mobile phone.  
Personal eSIM.  
Keyword: calling with the Personal  
eSIM.  
Keyword: Personal eSIM.  
59  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Connection mode  
Icon on the con-  
trol display  
Data exchange between mobile de-  
vice and vehicle.  
Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.  
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.  
hotspot.  
Keyword: personal hotspot.  
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and  
via voice control.  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
voice control.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Playing music from a USB device.  
Keyword: audio.  
USB.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
Additional information:  
USB port, refer to page 241.  
60  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Functional requirements  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has  
been activated.  
BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade  
▷
▷
Cellular network reception.  
Consent to transmit the corresponding data  
was given in the Data Protection menu.  
Principle  
Additional information:  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-  
date the entire software of the vehicle. This  
makes new functions, functional enhance-  
ments or quality improvements available.  
Data protection, refer to page 65.  
Search for an upgrade  
Functional requirement  
Standby must be turned on to search for a  
Remote Software Upgrade.  
General information  
BMW recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes  
available.  
Automatic search  
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in  
the background.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Manual search  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Search for upgrades"  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
61  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
Download of an upgrade  
Information about the version  
Automatic download  
General information  
If available, the data for a Remote Software  
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the  
vehicle. No download consent is required.  
The information about the version contains a  
description of the updates included in the Re-  
mote Software Upgrade. During the download  
and after the installation has been successfully  
completed, the information about the version  
can be displayed on the control display.  
Via My BMW App  
If an upgrade is available, information on the  
new software version is displayed in the My  
BMW App.  
This information is also available in the Con-  
nectedDrive customer portal.  
The data for the upgrade can then be down-  
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an  
existing WLAN connection.  
Displaying information  
Display in the vehicle:  
Data can then be sent from the mobile device  
to the vehicle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
This transmission method accelerates the  
download of the data, for instance in areas  
with limited mobile network availability.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5.  
▷
Display currently installed version:  
"Installed version:"  
You do not need to be present in the vehicle to  
download the data to a mobile device.  
▷
Display new available version:  
"Info on version"  
1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW  
App on your smartphone.  
2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via  
Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.  
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:  
 
Data for the upgrade is sent from the mo-  
bile device to the vehicle both while driving  
and when stopped. Depending on the size  
of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive  
your vehicle to complete the data transfer.  
Installing the upgrade  
General information  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-  
grade may result in the deletion of software  
changes, e.g., performance increases not  
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,  
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, Communication.  
▷
Modifications to the electrical system of the  
vehicle, for instance to control units, that  
have not been made by the vehicle manu-  
facturer can lead to an interruption of the  
installation.  
▷
The installation does not occur until the  
consent was given.  
62  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
▷
The installation may take around 20 mi-  
nutes.  
▷
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-  
cle for the consent for installation.  
▷
▷
The installation cannot be terminated.  
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lighting.  
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-  
stallation.  
Remove the devices connected to the diag-  
nostic socket.  
▷
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-  
lation.  
Installing immediately  
The upgrade can be installed immediately if all  
prerequisites have been met.  
Prerequisites for the installation  
▷
Sufficiently charged battery.  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Start upgrade now"  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.  
The selector lever position P is engaged.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
The engine is turned off and sufficiently  
cooled down.  
Installing with timer  
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-  
requisites on the control display.  
When the trip is completed, a timer can be  
used to install the upgrade automatically at  
a configured time such as during the night.  
A later installation may make sense to meet  
functional requirements, e.g., a sufficiently  
cooled down engine.  
Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites  
automatically. Follow the instructions on the  
control display.  
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-  
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be  
offered for installation.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,  
after longer trips.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. Select the desired settings.  
The installation starts automatically when:  
Preparing the vehicle  
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public  
road.  
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have  
been established correctly.  
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured  
so that a fault message can be sent to the  
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-  
stallation is terminated.  
▷
All prerequisites continue to be met at the  
time of installation.  
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready  
state is turned on.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.  
Close the glass sunroof.  
Close the cargo area.  
Installing via the My BMW App  
Once all preparations are complete and all re-  
quirements are met, the upgrade installation  
Remove energy consuming devices such as  
a mobile phone.  
63  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
can also be started using the My BMW App  
when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade in-  
stallation can be started remotely.  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the  
printed Owner's Manual is the most current  
resource.  
Follow instructions in the My BMW App.  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is  
temporarily unavailable, for instance:  
After a software update in the vehicle  
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-  
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-  
est information.  
▷
▷
Hazard warning system.  
Central locking system and, if necessary,  
Comfort Access.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking lights.  
Horn.  
Alarm system.  
Emergency call.  
Power windows.  
Glass sunroof.  
Checking the fuel filler flap lock.  
Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
from the outside using the integrated key.  
After successful upgrade  
The vehicle can be used again immediately.  
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time  
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-  
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.  
After an extended stationary period, charge  
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.  
Malfunction  
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-  
structions on the control display or in the My  
BMW App.  
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact  
an authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
64  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
This personal data can be permanently de-  
leted using iDrive.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
data is deleted:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW IDs or driver profiles.  
Stored radio stations.  
Stored shortcuts.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Navigation, for instance stored destina-  
tions.  
Data protection  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.  
Data transfer  
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.  
Office data, for instance voice memos.  
Login accounts.  
Principle  
The vehicle offers different services, whose  
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-  
ice provider.  
Digital key.  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take  
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-  
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-  
Drive customer portal so that remote functions  
can no longer be used.  
General information  
The data transfer can be deactivated for some  
services. When the data transfer is deacti-  
vated, the respective service cannot be used.  
Functional requirements  
Settings  
▷
Data can only be deleted while stationary.  
The data transfer can be configured in different  
stages or individually for separate services.  
▷
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.  
Deleting data  
1.  
Apps menu  
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted  
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-  
tings.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
Additional information:  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 65.  
Deleting personal data in the vehicle  
Reset vehicle data  
Principle  
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-  
tory settings when the drive-ready state is  
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores  
personal data such as stored radio stations.  
65  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
switched off. Data can only be deleted while  
the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle key must  
be in the vehicle.  
With driver recognition, a BMW ID or driver  
profile can be activated as soon as you unlock  
your vehicle. For this, a vehicle key or digital  
key must be linked with the BMW ID or driver  
profile. After unlocking, you can change the  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Reset vehicle data"  
5. "Reset vehicle data"  
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when  
the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the  
guest profile.  
If the synchronization of settings has been en-  
abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal  
settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.  
Functional requirements  
The vehicle must be stationary to create,  
change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.  
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and  
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only  
possible when the vehicle has cellular network  
reception.  
BMW ID/driver profiles  
Principle  
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is  
the personal login for all relevant offers for the  
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the  
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle  
settings.  
Welcome window  
After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window  
is shown on the control display. The type of  
the welcome depends on the following prereq-  
uisites:  
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal  
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.  
▷
The vehicle does not have a stored BMW  
ID or driver profile:  
If a vehicle is used by several people, each per-  
son can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. If  
a BMW ID is activated, the settings stored for it  
are applied to the vehicle.  
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a  
BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.  
▷
The vehicle key or the digital key has not  
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-  
file:  
General information  
The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW  
IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered  
for selection. Additionally, it is possible to  
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver  
profile.  
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW  
ID can be registered via the My BMW App, in  
the ConnectedDrive Portal, or through an au-  
thorized service center.  
A driver profile is created in the vehicle.  
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-  
signed to the vehicle key or digital key:  
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW  
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the  
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa-  
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is  
used to log in.  
The welcome is personalized, the stored  
settings are activated. The BMW ID or the  
driver profile can be changed.  
As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on  
or the control display is tapped outside of the  
Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.  
The vehicle can store three BMW IDs or three  
driver profiles.  
66  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
It may be necessary to log in again with the  
BMW ID.  
Adding the BMW ID  
1.  
Tap the BMW ID icon or the personal  
image on the status bar.  
This icon is displayed on the status bar  
and indicates when it is necessary to login  
again.  
2. "Add BMW ID"  
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your  
smartphone.  
1. Select the BMW ID.  
2. Scan the QR code shown.  
4. Observe the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
Another login will be attempted. Once suc-  
cessfully logged in, all functions can be used  
again.  
▷
If you have installed the My BMW App  
on your smartphone and saved your  
BMW ID, the BMW ID is automatically  
transferred to the vehicle.  
My BMW app  
▷
If you do not have a BMW ID yet, you a  
new BMW ID can be registered.  
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,  
the vehicle is automatically added to the My  
BMW app. The My BMW App provides numer-  
ous beneficial functions and settings, e.g., user  
management.  
5. Select the other settings you want to  
change, e.g., to configure driver recognition  
as desired.  
Alternatively, an authorized service center can  
add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,  
the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the  
control display in the corresponding vehicle.  
To configure driver recognition, the corre-  
sponding vehicle key or digital key must be  
detected in the vehicle.  
Driver recognition can be set or changed in  
the settings at a later time.  
In rare cases, the use of My BMW App func-  
tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More  
information is shown on the control display.  
6. Change any additional settings as neces-  
sary.  
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by  
an authorized service center and added to the  
vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed  
on the control display in the corresponding ve-  
hicle.  
Creating a driver profile  
In countries where BMW ConnectedDrive is not  
available, driver profiles can be created.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW  
App.  
2. "Add driver profile"  
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.  
4. Select the desired setting:  
"Transfer settings"  
Confirming a BMW ID  
If the BMW ID was created by an authorized  
service center and added to the vehicle, you  
must then confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle:  
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-  
tings of the guest profile will be applied.  
1. Select the BMW ID.  
2. Scan the QR code shown.  
Primary user  
The primary user is the person who first adds  
their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the  
vehicle to their My BMW App. Alternatively, the  
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
67  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
primary user can be defined by an authorized  
service center.  
gers the activation of the assigned BMW ID  
or the assigned driver profile.  
The primary user has access to the following  
settings, for example:  
▷
If another key is detected on the driver's  
door after activating the BMW ID or the  
driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-  
file of the last key detected is activated.  
▷
▷
Removing BMW IDs saved to the vehicle.  
Transferring the primary user role to an-  
other BMW ID.  
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-  
signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-  
vated.  
▷
▷
Change vehicle-wide data protection set-  
tings.  
Create the main digital key.  
Setting synchronization  
If synchronization is switched on, settings from  
the following areas, for example, are continu-  
ously synchronized:  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 81.  
Automatic driver recognition  
If driver recognition has been established, au-  
tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file is triggered by the following actions:  
▷
▷
BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.  
Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home  
address, or map settings.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-  
tions.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button  
on the assigned vehicle key.  
iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-  
guage, or units.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle.  
The assigned vehicle key or the assigned  
digital key must be carried with you.  
Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac-  
tivation word.  
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching  
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the  
assigned digital key must be carried with  
you. Depending on the country, it may not  
be possible to recognize the digital key.  
Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling  
and home lights.  
Settings from the following areas are only  
synchronized when you log in for the first time:  
▷
Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s  
seat position or temperature setting.  
If there are several vehicle keys or digital keys  
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the  
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to  
the following priority:  
▷
Data protection menu.  
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile  
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers  
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or  
the assigned driver profile.  
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be  
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select  
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome  
window.  
The guest profile is activated when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-  
signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.  
▷
If a vehicle key and a digital key are de-  
tected at the same time, the digital key trig-  
68  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed  
at any time via iDrive:  
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Manage BMW IDs"  
2.  
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"  
"Change driver profile"  
"Change driver profile"  
3.  
Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or  
the desired driver profile.  
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.  
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.  
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes  
the vehicle to be removed from the My BMW  
App. If the BMW ID has been synchronized  
with the BMW Cloud, the data stored in the  
BMW Cloud is retained after the BMW ID is  
deleted. If the currently active BMW ID is re-  
moved, the guest profile is activated.  
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,  
the stored settings are loaded.  
Guest profile  
The guest profile can be activated and  
changed by anyone.  
Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App  
removes the corresponding BMW ID from the  
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with  
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the  
BMW Cloud will be retained.  
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-  
matically active:  
▷
A BMW ID has not yet been added or a  
driver profile has not yet been created.  
If the vehicle is removed from the primary us-  
er’s My BMW App, it will also be removed from  
the My BMW App of the other users. The cor-  
responding BMW IDs are removed from the  
vehicle.  
▷
No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-  
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key  
that was used to unlock the vehicle.  
The following limitations apply to the guest  
profile:  
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, it is  
removed from each user’s My BMW App, and  
all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.  
▷
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,  
navigation functions or saving favorites.  
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.  
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the  
guest profile.  
Transfer of the vehicle key  
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or  
a driver profile can be used to view or change  
the stored personal settings.  
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign driver detection  
to the guest profile.  
In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-  
zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.  
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-  
sons, any assigned driver detection should be  
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can  
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the  
driver profile.  
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome  
screen or via iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to  
transfer a digital key to permit other persons  
the use of your own vehicle.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"  
"Change driver profile"  
Additional information:  
3. "Continue as guest"  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 81.  
69  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Settings  
System limits  
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or  
the digital key may not always be possible in  
the following cases, for example:  
General information  
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-  
ating a driver profile can be changed.  
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-  
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver  
profile are located in the outer area on the  
driver's side of the vehicle.  
2. "Settings"  
The following settings are available for the  
BMW ID:  
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked via the My  
BMW App.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.  
The profile picture.  
The use of personal settings that are stored for  
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-  
cal limitations. For example, settings may be  
stored for a system that is not available, or  
available in a non-compatible version, in other  
vehicles.  
The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.  
The personal salutation.  
The following settings are available for the  
driver profile:  
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.  
The profile picture.  
The profile name.  
Selecting a profile picture  
The profile picture can be selected from the  
predefined profile pictures:  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Manage profile picture"  
4. "Select profile picture"  
The personal profile picture for a BMW ID can  
be adopted from the profile in the My BMW  
App. This requires that the synchronization  
with the BMW Cloud is activated in the set-  
tings. After transferring the profile picture from  
the My BMW App, you can only select one of  
the predefined images if the profile picture in  
the My BMW App is deleted or synchronization  
is deactivated.  
70  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-  
picion that a battery or button cell battery has  
been swallowed or is located in any part of  
the body.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Vehicle key  
General information  
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of  
delivery, each containing an integrated key.  
Buttons on the vehicle key.  
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-  
tery.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings are possible  
for the button functions.  
Unlock.  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-  
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.  
Lock.  
Pre-conditioning, refer to page 235.  
To provide information on maintenance rec-  
ommendations, the service data is stored in  
the vehicle key.  
Unlock the cargo area.  
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle  
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting  
the vehicle.  
Panic mode.  
Pathway lighting, refer to page 156.  
Safety information  
Additional vehicle keys  
Additional vehicle keys are available from an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning  
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.  
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-  
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries  
within two hours, for example due to internal  
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key  
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-  
71  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Push battery in arrow direction using a  
Loss of vehicle keys  
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
pointed object and lift it out.  
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID  
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle  
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can  
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file.  
Replacing the battery  
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-  
tive side facing up.  
NOTICE  
5. Press the lid closed.  
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-  
vice can damage the device. There is a risk  
of property damage. Always replace the dis-  
charged battery with a battery with the same  
voltage, the same size and the same specifi-  
cation.  
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key  
until the integrated key engages.  
Have old batteries disposed of by an  
authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop,  
or take them to a collection point.  
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle  
key.  
Batteries contain harmful chemicals. It  
is prohibited by law to dispose of bat-  
teries together with household waste.  
2. Place the integrated key underneath the  
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and  
lift the lid with a lever movement of the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
Integrated key  
General information  
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked man-  
ually using the integrated key.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-  
ment.  
Safety information  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
72  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
Unlocking the vehicle manually  
1. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-  
ward with one hand.  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
Removing the integrated key  
1. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
2. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key  
by turning it counterclockwise.  
2. Pull off frame from integrated key.  
3. Pull out the vehicle key and release the  
door handle.  
4. Open the driver's door.  
5. Press the central locking button to unlock  
the other doors.  
With the vehicle de-energized: pull the door  
opener of the other doors from the inside.  
Locking the vehicle manually  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.  
73  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Emergency detection of the vehicle  
key  
Lock button for manual locking of the doors.  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.  
Locking the vehicle  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Enter the vehicle on the front passenger's  
side and close the front passenger door.  
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the  
mark on the steering column. Pay attention  
to the display in the instrument cluster.  
3. Press the central locking button to unlock  
all doors.  
2.  
▷
If the vehicle key is detected:  
If vehicle is de-energized: Press down the  
lock buttons on all doors except the front  
passenger door.  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-  
onds.  
▷
If the vehicle key is not detected:  
4. Exit the vehicle through the front passenger  
door.  
Slightly change the position of the vehi-  
cle key and repeat the procedure.  
5. Press down the lock button on the front  
passenger door and close the front pass-  
enger door.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are  
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
Alarm system  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-  
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.  
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency  
detection to switch off the alarm.  
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
If the doors are manually locked from the in-  
side, the alarm system is not activated.  
Do not transport the vehicle key together  
with metal objects.  
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity to the vehicle key.  
74  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-  
imity to other electronic devices.  
Warning  
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity  
of the wireless charging tray.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Place the vehicle key in a different location.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-  
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready  
state.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
Access to vehicle interior  
Safety information  
Warning  
NOTICE  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
The window will be lowered slightly when  
pulling on the door handle. In the event of  
frost, the window may be frozen solid and  
may not be able to be lowered. There is a  
risk of property damage. When pulling on the  
door handle, make sure that the window is  
lowered. If necessary, remove snow and ice  
from the window. Do not open the door with  
force.  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
Actions during unlocking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-  
cle:  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
▷
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap  
will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle  
will be unlocked.  
▷
▷
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-  
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.  
The welcome light can be turned on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
75  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
Settings, refer to page 86.  
With the vehicle key  
Unlocking the vehicle  
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned  
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver  
profile will be activated.  
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in  
exterior mirrors are folded out.  
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have  
been unlocked due to the settings in place,  
press the button on the vehicle key again to  
unlock the other vehicle access points.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using  
the button inside the vehicle, they will not  
fold out when the vehicle is unlocked.  
The lighting functions may depend on the am-  
bient brightness.  
▷
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched off.  
The alarm system is switched off.  
Additional information:  
Locking the vehicle  
▷
▷
▷
Settings, refer to page 86.  
1. Close the driver's door.  
Welcome lights, refer to page 155.  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 66.  
2.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
All vehicle access points are locked.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
Actions during locking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:  
▷
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
The vehicle can be accessed without operating  
the vehicle key.  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-  
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically  
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers  
are switched on.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
The following functions are executed:  
▷
All doors, the cargo area, and the fuel filler  
flap are locked.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched on. This  
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-  
ing the lock buttons or the door openers.  
▷
▷
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be  
outside of the vehicle near the doors.  
▷
The alarm system is switched on.  
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when  
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk  
twice. In this case, drive-ready state must be  
turned off using the Start/Stop button.  
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must  
elapse before unlocking is possible.  
Additional information:  
76  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
When the driver walks away from the unlocked  
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be  
locked.  
Unlock vehicle  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-  
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking  
zone.  
The unlocking zone is located within a radius  
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear  
of the vehicle.  
Reach into the recessed grip of a front door.  
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key  
leaves the locking zone.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close the driver's door.  
The locking zone is located within a radius of  
approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of  
the vehicle.  
2. With your finger, touch the grooved surface  
on a closed door handle for approx. 1 sec-  
ond without reaching into the recessed grip.  
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking  
zone for an extended period of time without  
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-  
cally.  
If a passenger is detected in the front pass-  
enger seat during locking and the seat belt of  
the front passenger is engaged in the seat belt  
buckle during locking:  
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured  
against theft.  
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
Malfunction  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-  
ing request detection on the door handles.  
Actions during unlocking  
If the settings specify that only the driver's  
door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,  
note the following:  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock  
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key  
or use the integrated key.  
The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only  
unlock when the driver is within the driver's  
door unlocking zone.  
Touchless unlocking/locking of the  
vehicle  
Settings, refer to page 86.  
Principle  
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle  
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.  
77  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
Locking/unlocking the vehicle  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
▷
Unlocking: when entering the unlocking  
zone, the doors and cargo area must be  
closed.  
▷
▷
Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the  
doors and cargo area must be closed.  
Automatic unlocking and locking must be  
activated in the settings.  
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-  
ter of the driver's door handle.  
▷
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.  
For contactless locking of the vehicle, no  
second vehicle key may be within a radius  
of 18 ft/6 m around the vehicle.  
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,  
make sure that all doors and the cargo area  
are closed.  
▷
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for  
several days, contactless unlocking/locking  
will only be available after the vehicle has  
been driven.  
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change  
the position of the Key Card and repeat the  
procedure.  
Additional information:  
With the BMW Digital Key  
Settings, refer to page 86.  
Principle  
With the Key Card  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, a digital key can be installed  
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-  
lock and lock the vehicle.  
Principle  
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-  
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used  
to unlock and lock the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 81.  
Additional information:  
Key Card, refer to page 80.  
Locking/unlocking the vehicle  
General information  
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.  
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at  
the center of the driver's door handle. The po-  
78  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
sition of the near field communication antenna  
depends on the smartphone model.  
Warning  
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,  
make sure that all doors and the cargo area  
are closed.  
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of prop-  
erty damage. Make sure that the travel path  
of the trunk lid is clear while opening and  
closing.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in  
the vehicle key?  
With the vehicle key  
▷
The app’s remote services offer the option  
to lock and unlock a vehicle.  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
This requires an active BMW Connected-  
Drive contract, and the app must be instal-  
led on a smartphone.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the following settings can be  
changed:  
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via  
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.  
▷
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle  
key also unlocks the doors.  
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is  
required.  
▷
Before unlocking the cargo area with the  
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.  
Access to the cargo area  
Functional requirements  
Selector lever position P must be engaged to  
open the cargo area with the vehicle key.  
General information  
It may not be possible to open the cargo area  
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.  
You must enable the setting for opening with  
the vehicle key.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Valet parking mode, refer to page 85.  
Settings, refer to page 86.  
Safety information  
Unlocking the cargo area  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key for approx. 1 second.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is  
clear while opening and closing.  
On the cargo area  
General information  
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be  
accessed without activating the vehicle key.  
The key is automatically detected near the ve-  
hicle.  
79  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Functional prerequisite  
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
Emergency cargo area release  
Opening the cargo area  
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.  
The cargo area is unlocked.  
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-  
ton on the cargo area.  
Key Card  
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key  
with you and press the button on the cargo  
area.  
Principle  
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked  
and locked, as well as started.  
Locked doors are not unlocked.  
General information  
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
Closing the cargo area  
Pull down the cargo area using the recessed  
grips.  
A digital key that has already been paired with  
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The  
digital key must be activated via iDrive.  
Inside the vehicle  
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key  
Card or take the Key Card with you because  
the active Key Card can be used to start the  
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to  
a service appointment.  
Functional requirements  
The vehicle key or digital key must be located  
within the vehicle in order to close the cargo  
area using the button inside the vehicle.  
Unlocking the trunk  
Safety information  
Press the button in the driver's door.  
NOTICE  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is  
a risk of property damage. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
80  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Activating/deactivating Key Card in  
the vehicle  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with  
the activated Key Card.  
General information  
Additional information:  
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the  
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the  
vehicle key.  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 75.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
Functional requirement  
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to  
activate and deactivate the Key Card.  
Activating Key Card  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place activated Key Card in the center of  
the smartphone tray.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key  
Card can be removed from the tray.  
Malfunction  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key  
Card if there are objects between the smart-  
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or  
smartphone case.  
2. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-  
phone tray.  
3. Follow instructions on the control display.  
Deactivating Key Card  
1.  
Apps menu  
BMW Digital Key  
2. "Vehicle"  
Principle  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
BMW Digital Key lets you lock and unlock and  
start your vehicle using a digital key.  
5. "Key Card"  
6. "Deactivate Key Card"  
General information  
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality  
depend on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
81  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-  
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile  
devices.  
Enabling the main digital key  
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a  
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle  
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-  
hicle for this purpose.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible  
smartphone, this function must be offered by  
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW  
app can be used to check if the smartphone  
and vehicle are compatible and which func-  
tions are supported.  
Proof of authorization can be started via the  
My BMW App or using the activation code in  
the corresponding smartphone function, e.g.,  
the Wallet app.  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual  
settings can be assigned to a digital key.  
Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehi-  
cle to be enabled.  
When using a smartphone as a digital key, al-  
ways carry a vehicle key or the activated Key  
Card with you. This ensures access to the ve-  
hicle, even in the event of a smartphone fail-  
ure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key  
or Key Card with you if the vehicle needs to  
be handed over to another person. You can  
then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card  
instead of your smartphone.  
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital  
Key menu, on the app, or on the control dis-  
play.  
Sharing digital keys  
General information  
Digital Key allows the sharing of digital keys  
with other people. This option is available via  
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital  
key. This function must be supported by the  
smartphone.  
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-  
ice appointment.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 66.  
Key Card, refer to page 80.  
Forwarding authorization  
To share the digital key, select the correspond-  
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in  
the Wallet app.  
 
Functional requirements  
As soon as a digital key is shared with another  
person, the person will receive an invitation.  
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key  
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.  
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW  
Digital Key  
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account of the vehicle owner.  
The rechargeable battery of the smart-  
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-  
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable  
battery depends on the smartphone.  
Authentication  
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone  
model, an authentication may be required for  
security and safety reasons.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone for contactless unlocking and locking  
using the digital key.  
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key  
or another method may be used for authenti-  
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions  
on the smartphone or the control display.  
82  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Deleting digital keys  
Resetting the function  
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-  
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-  
hicle.  
General information  
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the  
list of enabled digital keys.  
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,  
all digital keys including the main digital key  
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is  
retained and deactivated.  
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.  
Deleting the main digital key  
The main digital key can be deleted from the  
smartphone or via iDrive.  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be  
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.  
The main digital key must be enabled again to  
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.  
The deletion of the main digital key is com-  
pleted immediately.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Deleting a shared key  
2. "Vehicle"  
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-  
phone with the master Digital Key, using the  
smartphone with the shared key to be deleted,  
or via iDrive.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. "Reset function"  
The deletion via the smartphone using the  
main digital key will not be performed until the  
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to  
be deleted.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked using  
the door handle.  
If the smartphone associated with a shared  
key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it  
will be deleted immediately.  
Additional information:  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 75.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
Deletion via iDrive  
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be  
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the  
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone  
tray.  
Using the smartphone tray  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. If necessary, select the digital key.  
6. Delete the Digital Key.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place smartphone in the center of the  
smartphone tray.  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
83  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-  
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover  
that is not suitable.  
4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on  
drive-ready state.  
Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card  
are located between the smartphone and  
the smartphone cover.  
Sale of the smartphone  
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior  
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that  
the smartphone can no longer be used for the  
vehicle.  
Fault of the connection from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
Shielding of the smartphone due to build-  
ings or metal objects.  
Changing smartphones  
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital  
Key, activate the new smartphone according to  
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The  
previous master key is deleted when the new  
smartphone is activated.  
Buttons for the central  
locking system  
General information  
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-  
ing off.  
Sale of the vehicle  
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital  
Key function or remove the vehicle from the  
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle  
owner.  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle  
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning  
system and interior lights are illuminated.  
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-  
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-  
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key  
is retained and deactivated.  
Overview  
System limits  
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-  
sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off  
with a digital key.  
Additional information:  
Alarm system, refer to page 87.  
The central locking buttons are located on the  
front door.  
Malfunction  
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
Lock.  
Unlock.  
84  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Vehicle settings cannot be changed via  
iDrive.  
Locking the vehicle  
Press the button in the driver's door  
or front passengers door with the front  
doors closed.  
Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-  
file cannot be changed.  
▷
▷
Personal data cannot be displayed.  
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
The audio system is muted, with the possi-  
ble volume of the audio system being lim-  
ited.  
The vehicle is not secured against theft when  
locking.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The integrated Universal Remote Control is  
deactivated.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Press the button in the driver's door or  
front passenger’s door.  
Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned  
off.  
The availability of certain settings of the  
driving modes is limited.  
Opening the door  
The M1 and M2 buttons on the steering  
wheel are not active.  
▷
Press the button to unlock all the  
doors.  
Additional information:  
Pull the door opener above the arm-  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 66.  
rest.  
▷
▷
Front doors: pull the door opener on the  
door to open the door. The other doors re-  
main locked.  
Functional requirement  
The driver has registered in the vehicle with a  
BMW ID.  
Back doors: pull twice on the door opener  
on the door to be opened; the first time  
unlocks the door, the second time opens it.  
The other doors remain locked.  
Activating the valet parking mode  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Valet parking mode"  
5. "Lock tailgate"  
Valet parking mode  
Principle  
The cargo area is locked and disconnected  
from the central locking system.  
In the valet parking mode, the control display is  
disabled.  
6. If necessary, "PIN"  
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle  
is handed over for valet parking.  
If the active BMW ID does not have an as-  
signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The  
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-  
ing mode.  
General information  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
valet parking mode may not be available.  
7. If necessary, enter the PIN.  
8. "Activate valet parking mode"  
Valet Parking mode has the following restric-  
tions:  
85  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Automatic unlocking  
Deactivating valet parking mode  
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock  
screen.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2.  
▷
Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the  
access data for the BMW ID.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
If the selected BMW ID does not have  
an assigned PIN: enter the access data  
for the BMW ID.  
▷
▷
"Unlock doors at end of trip"  
"Unlock doors when in P"  
If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically  
when drive-ready state is turned off or selector  
lever position P is engaged.  
Settings  
Automatic locking  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings for opening  
and closing are possible.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Unlocking and locking  
5. "Lock after a short time"  
The vehicle locks automatically after a short  
period of time if no door is opened after un-  
locking.  
Doors  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Confirmation signals from the vehicle  
1.  
Apps menu  
5. "Unlock"  
2. "Vehicle"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
▷
"Driver's door only"  
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-  
locks the entire vehicle.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Flash on lock/unlock"  
Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice,  
locking by flashing once.  
▷
"All doors"  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
▷
With alarm system:  
"Sound on lock/unlock"  
Touchless unlocking/locking  
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound  
signals, locking is confirmed with one  
sound signal.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Comfort access"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
86  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Folding mirrors in automatically  
General information  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm  
system reacts to the following changes:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo  
area.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
▷
▷
Movements in the vehicle interior.  
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"  
Changes in the vehicle inclination such as  
during attempts at stealing a wheel or  
when towing the vehicle.  
Cargo area  
▷
▷
Disconnected battery voltage.  
Cargo area and doors  
Improper use of the socket for OBD on-  
board diagnostics.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-  
nected to the diagnostic socket.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
The alarm system signals these changes visu-  
ally and acoustically:  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Tailgate"  
▷
Acoustic alarm:  
Depending on the equipment, the cargo  
area will be unlocked or opened.  
Depending on local regulations, the acous-  
tic alarm may be suppressed.  
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"  
▷
Optical alarm:  
Depending on the equipment, the cargo  
area will be unlocked or opened and the  
doors are unlocked.  
By flashing of the hazard warning system  
and headlights, where required.  
Do not modify the system to ensure function of  
the alarm system.  
▷
▷
"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is  
already unlocked"  
The vehicle must be unlocked before  
the cargo area can be operated with the  
vehicle key.  
Turning the alarm system on/off  
The alarm system is turned on as soon as the  
vehicle is locked from the outside.  
"Lock tailgate button"  
The alarm system does not turn on if the vehi-  
cle is locked manually from the inside.  
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-  
cle key is disabled.  
The alarm system is switched off as soon as  
the vehicle is unlocked.  
Alarm system  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
The alarm system is triggered when a door  
is opened if the door was unlocked using the  
integrated key in the door lock.  
Principle  
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic  
signal when someone attempts to open the  
locked vehicle incorrectly.  
87  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
The indicator light flashes even though all  
access points have been closed:  
Opening the cargo area with the  
alarm system switched on  
The cargo area can be opened even when the  
alarm system is switched on.  
Alarm system error.  
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will  
be locked and monitored again. The hazard  
warning system flashes once during closing.  
The indicator light flashes after unlocking  
until drive-ready state is switched on, but  
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:  
Panic mode  
The alarm has been triggered.  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find  
yourself in a dangerous situation.  
Tilt alarm sensor  
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
The alarm system responds in situations such  
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-  
cle is towed.  
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehi-  
cle key three times in succession.  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
Interior motion sensor  
The vehicle interior is monitored.  
Indicator light on the interior mirror  
The alarm system triggers when movement is  
detected inside the vehicle.  
The windows and the glass sunroof must be  
closed for the system to function properly.  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-  
thorized action occurred.  
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
The alarm system is switched on.  
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:  
The indicator light flashes for approx.  
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.  
In duplex garages.  
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,  
at sea or on a trailer.  
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor  
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate  
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed  
access points are secured.  
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.  
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-  
fueling.  
When the remaining open access points  
are closed, the interior motion sensor and  
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion  
sensor can be switched off in such situations.  
88  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and  
interior motion sensor  
With the vehicle key  
Opening windows  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
within 30 seconds as soon as the vehi-  
cle is locked.  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key after unlocking.  
The indicator light illuminates for approx.  
2 seconds and then continues to flash.  
The windows open for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked  
again.  
Closing the windows  
With Comfort Access: press and hold  
the button on the vehicle key after lock-  
ing.  
Ending the alarm  
Unlock the vehicle.  
The windows close for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently  
be turned on via the emergency detection of  
the vehicle key.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
Window  
On the door handle  
General information  
When a window is frequently opened to the  
same position, this task can be performed by  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is  
useful if you frequently use the same parking  
garage, for example.  
Principle  
The windows can be closed using the door  
handle without operating the vehicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 54.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
Safety information  
Functional prerequisite  
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in  
your pants pocket.  
Warning  
When operating the windows, body parts and  
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-  
jury and risk of property damage. Make sure  
that the travel path of the windows is clear  
while opening and closing.  
89  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Closing the windows  
Opening windows  
▷
Press the switch to the resistance  
point.  
The window opens while the switch  
is being held.  
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
The window opens automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
With your finger, touch the grooved surface on  
a closed door handle without reaching into the  
recessed grip.  
Closing the windows  
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance  
point.  
In addition to locking, the windows and glass  
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.  
The window closes while the switch  
is being held.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
The window closes automatically.  
Pulling again stops the motion.  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Inside the vehicle  
Principle  
Overview  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts becoming jammed between the  
door frame and window while a window is be-  
ing closed.  
General information  
If resistance or blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing will be in-  
terrupted.  
Power windows  
Safety information  
Warning  
Functional requirements  
Accessories on the windows such as anten-  
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There  
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in  
the area of movement of the windows.  
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The vehicle key or digital key must be inside  
the vehicle.  
90  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Closing without the anti-trap  
mechanism  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
Closing glass sunroof  
With Comfort Access: press and hold  
the button on the vehicle key in close  
range of the vehicle after locking.  
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be  
closed for as long as the button on the vehicle  
key is pressed.  
1. Pull the  
switch past the resistance  
point and hold it there.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
The window closes with limited anti-trap  
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a  
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.  
2. Pull the  
switch past the resistance  
point again within approx. 4 seconds and  
hold it there.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
The window closes without the anti-trap  
mechanism.  
The glass sunroof can be closed using the  
door handle without operating the vehicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
Glass sunroof  
Safety information  
Warning  
Functional prerequisite  
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in  
your pants pocket.  
Closing glass sunroof  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the area of movement of the  
glass sunroof is clear during opening and  
closing.  
With the vehicle key  
Opening glass sunroof  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key after unlocking.  
Touch the grooved surface on the external  
door handle of a closed door with your finger  
and hold it there without grasping the recessed  
grip.  
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be  
opened for as long as the button on the vehicle  
key is pressed.  
In addition to locking, the windows and glass  
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.  
91  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
Lifting/closing glass sunroof  
Push switch briefly upward.  
▷
The closed glass sunroof tilts  
and the sun protection opens  
slightly.  
▷
The opened glass sunroof  
closes until it is in the tilted  
position. The sun protection  
does not move.  
Inside the vehicle  
Functional requirements  
The glass sunroof and sun protection can be  
operated under the following conditions.  
▷
The tilted glass sunroof closes.  
▷
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and  
sun protection separately  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Speed of 155 mph/250 km/h not exceeded.  
▷
Slide switch back to the re-  
sistance point and hold.  
The vehicle key must be inside the vehicle.  
General information  
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are  
operated using the same switch.  
Holding down the switch  
opens the sun protection. If  
the sun protection is already  
fully open, the glass sunroof  
opens.  
Overview  
▷
▷
Slide switch forward to the resistance point  
and hold.  
Button in the vehicle  
The glass sunroof closes while the switch  
is being held. If the glass sunroof is already  
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro-  
tection closes.  
Slide the switch back past the resistance  
point.  
The sun protection opens automatically. If  
the sun protection is already fully open, the  
glass sunroof opens automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
Opening/closing the glass sun-  
roof/sun protection.  
▷
Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point.  
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If  
the glass sunroof is already closed or in  
the tilted position, the sun protection closes  
automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
92  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and  
sun protection together  
Closing from the open position without  
the anti-trap mechanism  
If an external hazard or ice prevents normal  
closure, proceed as follows:  
▷
Briefly press out the switch  
twice in succession toward  
the rear past the resistance  
point.  
The glass sunroof and sun  
protection open together.  
Pressing the switch again  
stops the motion.  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-  
ing vehicle.  
▷
Briefly press out the switch twice in succes-  
sion toward the front past the resistance  
point.  
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point and hold.  
The glass sunroof and sun protection close  
together.  
The glass sunroof closes with limited anti-  
trap mechanism. If the closing force ex-  
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is inter-  
rupted.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
Comfort position  
4. Push the switch forward again past the  
resistance point and hold until the glass  
sunroof closes without the anti-trap mech-  
anism. Make sure that the closing path is  
clear.  
In some models, the wind noises in the car's  
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is  
not fully open. In these models, the automatic  
function initially only opens the glass sunroof  
up to this comfort position.  
Operating the switch inside the vehicle again  
opens the glass sunroof completely.  
Closing from the lifted position without  
the anti-trap mechanism  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Principle  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts from becoming jammed between  
the roof frame and glass sunroof while the  
glass sunroof is closing.  
1. Close all doors.  
General information  
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-  
ing vehicle.  
If a resistance or blockage is detected while  
the glass sunroof is closing, the closing opera-  
tion is interrupted once the roof reaches the  
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos-  
ing from the tilted position.  
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point and hold.  
93  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Initializing after a power interruption  
General information  
After a power interruption during the opening  
or closing process, the glass sunroof can only  
be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the  
system can help in this case.  
The system can be initialized under the follow-  
ing conditions:  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
▷
The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-  
alization is completed.  
▷
▷
The drive-ready state is established.  
The outside temperature is above  
41 ℉/5 ℃.  
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes  
without the anti-trap mechanism.  
Make sure that the closing path is clear.  
Initializing the system  
Press the switch up and hold  
it until the initialization is com-  
plete:  
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.  
▷
▷
▷
If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then  
closes again.  
If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,  
then opens and closes again.  
The sun protection is initialized in the  
closed position.  
Initialization is complete once the glass sun-  
roof and the sun protection have opened then  
closed again.  
94  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,  
the protective effect of the seat belt can no  
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding  
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat  
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest  
so that it is in the most upright position as  
possible and do not adjust again while driv-  
ing.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Sitting safely  
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of  
the occupants can make a vital contribution to  
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the travel  
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-  
ment.  
In the event of an accident, the correct seat  
position plays an important role. Follow the in-  
formation in the following chapters.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 95.  
Manually adjustable seats  
Seat belts, refer to page 100.  
Head restraints, refer to page 102.  
Airbags, refer to page 162.  
Overview  
Seats  
Safety information  
Warning  
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-  
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Only adjust the  
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is  
stationary.  
The levers for setting the seats are located on  
the front seats.  
95  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Adjusting the height  
Warning  
If a seat is not locked, it may move unexpect-  
edly while driving. Vehicle control could be  
lost. There is a risk of accident, injury, and  
property damage. After adjusting, move the  
seat forward or back slightly, making sure the  
seat engages properly.  
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as  
needed until the seat has reached the desired  
height.  
Adjusting backrest tilt  
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired  
direction.  
Adjusting seat tilt  
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the  
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.  
Electrically adjustable seats  
General information  
The current seat position can be stored using  
the memory function.  
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as  
needed until the seat has reached the desired  
inclination.  
96  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Adjusting seat tilt  
The switches for setting the seats are located  
on the front seats.  
Tilt switch up or down.  
Adjusting backrest tilt  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Tilt switch forward or backward.  
Press switch forward or backward.  
Adjusting the seat position  
automatically  
Adjusting the height  
General information  
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored  
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver  
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is  
reactivated at a later time, the saved position  
will be called up automatically.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press switch up or down.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select driver’s seat.  
5. "Use automatically"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
97  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the backrest width  
Thigh support  
▷
Press the front section of the but-  
ton:  
Sport seat  
The backrest width decreases.  
▷
Press the rear section of the button:  
The backrest width increases.  
Entering the rear  
Safety information  
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push  
the thigh support forward or back.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the travel  
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-  
ment.  
Lumbar support  
Principle  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-  
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar  
region of the spine. The lower back and the  
spine are supported for upright sitting position.  
Warning  
Unexpected movements of the rear seat  
backrest while driving may occur if the rear  
seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control  
could be lost. There is a risk of accident, in-  
jury, and property damage. Fold back and  
lock the backrests before driving. Make sure  
the backrest engages correctly by slightly  
moving forward and back.  
Adjusting the lumbar support  
▷
Press the front/rear section of the  
button:  
The curvature is increased/de-  
creased.  
▷
Press the upper/lower section of the but-  
ton:  
The curvature is shifted up/down.  
Backrest width  
Principle  
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side  
support when cornering.  
General information  
The backrest width is changed by adjusting  
the side sections of the backrest.  
98  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Push the seat backrest rearward  
Manual longitudinal setting  
Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.  
Fold the seat backrest forward  
The seat moves automatically to the last seat  
position that was stored.  
1. Pull lever up to the stop.  
Calibrating the front seats  
General information  
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer  
functions precisely, a Check Control message  
is displayed on the control display.  
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-  
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.  
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.  
3. Push the seat forward.  
Safety information  
Push the seat backrest rearward  
Warning  
1. Push the seat back into the initial position.  
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the travel  
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-  
ment.  
Electric longitudinal setting  
Fold the seat backrest forward  
1. Pull lever up to the stop.  
Calibrating the front seat  
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-  
ward until the seat stops.  
2. Press the switch forward again until the  
seat stops.  
As soon as the message on the control dis-  
play disappears, the calibration is complete.  
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-  
bration.  
If the message is still shown after repeated  
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.  
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat  
will automatically move to the most forward  
position.  
The process will be terminated when the  
switch for the forward/back direction adjust-  
ment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.  
99  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seat belts  
Warning  
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,  
General information  
the protective effect of the middle seat belt  
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat  
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.  
Always make sure that seat belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off. The  
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-  
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-  
place seat belts.  
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to  
achieve the best possible protective effect for  
the seat belts when used properly and with the  
correct seat settings.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail  
in the following situations:  
Additional information:  
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any  
other way.  
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 95.  
Safety information  
▷
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders  
were modified.  
Warning  
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in  
the event of an accident. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do  
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat  
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat  
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat  
belts checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of  
the seat belt to serve its protective function.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Do not strap in more than one person per  
single seat belt. Infants and children are not  
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be  
transported and secured in designated child  
restraint systems.  
Correct use of seat belts  
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over  
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all  
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.  
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over  
your lap. The seat belt must not press on  
your stomach.  
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard  
or fragile objects.  
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.  
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward  
around your upper body area.  
100  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has  
been fastened correctly.  
Buckling the seat belt  
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder  
and hip to put it on.  
Icon  
Meaning  
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt  
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage  
audibly.  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is  
not buckled.  
Seat belt on the passenger  
seat or another seat in the ve-  
hicle is not buckled.  
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-  
responding seat.  
Seat belt is not buckled on the  
corresponding seat.  
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an  
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help  
position the buckle when not in use.  
Rear Occupant Alert  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
Principle  
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.  
At the end of a trip, the system informs the  
driver of the possible presence of occupants on  
the rear seats.  
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.  
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt  
winder.  
General information  
If a door with access to the rear seat row is  
operated within 30 minutes before starting a  
drive, a notice appears on the control display  
and a signal tone sounds at the end of the  
drive.  
Seat belt reminder  
General information  
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned  
correctly.  
If the drive is continued within 30 minutes, the  
notice is displayed again after the drive is com-  
plete.  
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the  
following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
When the seat belt on the driver's side or  
on the passenger's side is not fastened.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-  
ing.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "System settings"  
When objects are lying on a seat.  
3. "Rear Occupant Alert"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-  
minates after turning on the drive-ready state  
when the seat belt reminder is active.  
101  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the height  
Front head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷
▷
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and  
push the head restraint down.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
To raise: push the head restraint up.  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
Adjusting the height: M Sport seat  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
Press switch up or down.  
Adjusting the height: M Carbon  
bucket seat  
The height of the head restraints cannot be  
set.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
102  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the distance: Manual  
head restraints  
Removing the head restraints: M  
Sport seat  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
Installing head restraints  
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head  
restraint.  
Rear head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
Back: press the button and push the head  
restraint toward the rear.  
Forward: pull the head restraint toward the  
front.  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
Adjusting the distance: M Sport seat  
The distance to the back of the head is ad-  
justed via the backrest inclination.  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint  
is as close as possible to the back of the head.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
Removing the head restraints  
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be  
sitting in the seat in question.  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re-  
sistance.  
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head  
restraint out completely.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
103  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Adjusting the height  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Folding down the head restraints  
▷
▷
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and  
push the head restraint down.  
General information  
To raise: push the head restraint up.  
To improve the view to the rear, the head re-  
straints can be folded down. Only fold down  
the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the  
corresponding seat.  
Removing the head restraint  
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest in ques-  
tion.  
Folding down the head restraints  
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to  
page 249.  
2. Raise the head restraint up against the re-  
sistance.  
3. Insert the integrated key.  
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the head re-  
straint back.  
To return the head restraint to its initial posi-  
tion, fold the head restraint forward as far as  
it will go. Make sure that the head restraint  
engages correctly.  
104  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Integrated key, refer to page 71.  
Photocells in the interior mirror are used to  
control this.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, both exterior  
mirrors are heated automatically as necessary  
and when drive-ready state is on.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-  
pear. The distance to the road users behind  
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance  
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Estimate  
the distance to the traffic behind by looking  
over your shoulder.  
4. Press and hold the integrated key and the  
button at the same time, arrows 1, and pull  
out the head restraint completely.  
Overview  
Installing the head restraints  
For installation, insert the head restraints in  
the mounts and slide them down until you feel  
resistance.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Exterior mirrors  
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.  
General information  
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is  
more curved than the driver's side mirror.  
Adjust the exterior mirrors.  
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the  
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If  
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated  
at a later time, the stored position is called up  
automatically.  
Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb  
Monitor.  
Adjusting the exterior mirrors  
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be  
stored using the memory function.  
Press the button.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver's  
side exterior mirror also dims automatically.  
105  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
The selected exterior mirror moves along with  
the button movement.  
Automatic dimming  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-  
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior  
mirror are used to control this.  
Selecting the exterior mirror  
To change over to the other mirror:  
Slide the switch.  
Automatic Curb Monitor  
Principle  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the  
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the  
mirror glass.  
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on  
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This  
improves your view of the curb and other low-  
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.  
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor  
Folding in/folding out the exterior  
mirrors  
1.  
Slide the switch to the driver's side  
mirror position.  
NOTICE  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle  
can be damaged in car washes. There is a  
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold  
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.  
Deactivating the Automatic Curb  
Monitor  
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side  
exterior mirror position.  
Press the button.  
Interior mirror, automatic  
dimming feature  
Folding is possible at vehicle speeds of up to  
approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.  
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-  
ful in the following situations:  
General information  
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.  
▷
▷
In car washes.  
On narrow roads.  
Photocells are used for control:  
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded  
out automatically at a speed of approx.  
25 mph/40 km/h.  
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.  
On the rear of the mirror.  
Automatic heating  
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated  
as needed and when the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
106  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
1. Fold the lever down completely.  
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands  
and move the steering wheel to the prefer-  
red height and angle to suit your seat posi-  
tion.  
3. Fold the lever back up.  
Manual transmission: electric  
steering wheel lock  
Warning  
Functional requirements  
With activated steering wheel locking, the ve-  
hicle cannot be steered. There is a risk of  
accident. Before moving the vehicle, switch  
on the standby state.  
▷
Keep the photocells clean.  
▷
Do not cover the area between the interior  
mirror and the windshield.  
The steering wheel automatically locks when  
the driver's door is opened from the inside.  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
To unlock, switch on the standby state.  
Memory function  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving  
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-  
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-  
age. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehi-  
cle is stationary only.  
Principle  
The following settings can be stored and, if  
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-  
tion:  
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Exterior mirror adjustment.  
Height of the Head-up display.  
Manual steering wheel adjustment  
General information  
Two memory locations with different settings  
can be set for each driver profile.  
The following settings are not stored:  
▷
▷
Backrest width.  
Lumbar support.  
107  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Calling up settings  
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.  
The stored position is called up.  
Warning  
The procedure stops when a seat setting  
switch or one of the memory buttons is  
pressed again.  
Using the memory function while driving can  
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only retrieve the memory func-  
tion when the vehicle is stationary.  
The adjustment of the seat position on the  
driver's side is interrupted after a short time  
while driving.  
Seat climate control  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the travel  
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-  
ment.  
Various climate control functions are available  
for the seats.  
Additional information:  
Climate control, refer to page 226.  
Overview  
The memory buttons are located on the front  
doors.  
Storing settings  
1. Set the desired position.  
2.  
Press the button. The LED illumi-  
nates.  
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2  
while the LED is illuminated. A signal  
sounds.  
108  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,  
especially children, or animals. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave  
people, especially children, or animals unat-  
tended in the vehicle.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Warning  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child  
restraint systems and their components to  
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn  
injuries when touching the hot components.  
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose  
the child restraint system to direct sunlight  
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let  
the child restraint system cool down before  
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-  
attended in the vehicle.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Children in the rear seat  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
General information  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Accident research shows that the safest place  
for children is in the rear seat.  
Children younger than 13 years of age or  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported  
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-  
tems designed for the age, weight and size  
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older  
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable  
child restraint system can no longer be used  
due to their age, weight, or size.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
109  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Installing child restraint  
systems  
Warning  
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly  
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without  
suitable additional child restraint systems.  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Secure children  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child  
restraint systems.  
General information  
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-  
erating and safety information of the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using child restraint systems.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The protective effect of child restraint sys-  
tems and their fastening systems which have  
been damaged or exposed to an accident  
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-  
erly restrained in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life.  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
General information  
When using a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front  
passenger airbag is deactivated.  
Do not use child restraint systems which  
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-  
dent.  
If attachment systems have been damaged  
or strained by an accident, have them  
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-  
ice center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-  
bag, refer to page 164.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
110  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
On the front passenger seat  
Child seat security  
Deactivating the airbag  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-  
enger seat belt can be permanently locked to  
fasten child restraint systems.  
After mounting a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front  
passenger airbag is deactivated.  
Locking the seat belt  
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.  
Additional information:  
Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-  
bag, refer to page 164.  
2. Secure the child restraint system with the  
seat belt.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
and pull it tight against the child restraint  
system. The seat belt is disabled.  
Seat position and height  
After installing a child restraint system, move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it will  
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest  
position. This seat position and height ensure  
the best possible position for the belt and of-  
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-  
dent.  
Unlocking the seat belt  
1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
completely.  
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-  
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that  
the belt is not constrained.  
Lower anchors for child  
restraint systems  
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt  
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the  
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-  
fully forward until the best possible seat belt  
guide position is reached.  
General information  
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-  
dren.  
Backrest width  
Pay attention to the specifications, operating  
tips and safety instructions from the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using child restraint systems.  
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a  
child restraint system on the front passenger  
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do  
not change the backrest width again and do  
not call up a memory position.  
111  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Position  
Mounts for lower anchors  
Icon  
Meaning  
General information  
The lower anchors may be used to attach the  
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child  
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child  
is restrained by the internal harnesses.  
The corresponding icon shows  
the mounts for the lower  
LATCH anchors.  
Seats equipped with lower an-  
chors are marked with a pair  
(2) of LATCH icons.  
Safety information  
For vehicles equipped with a  
middle seat:  
Warning  
If the lower anchors on child restraint system  
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint  
system will not be able to provide suitable  
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger  
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are  
correctly engaged and that the child restraint  
system fits securely against the backrest.  
It is not recommended to use  
the inner lower anchors of  
standard outer LATCH posi-  
tions to fasten a child restraint  
system on the middle seat.  
Use the vehicle seat belt in-  
stead for the middle seat.  
Before attaching child restraint  
systems  
Before installing a child restraint system, pull  
the seat belt away from the lower anchors of  
the child restraint system.  
Warning  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
Installing child restraint systems  
1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-  
turer's information.  
2. Make sure that the child restraint system  
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-  
chor on both sides.  
Child restraint systems with  
tether strap  
General information  
When attaching child restraint systems to the  
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-  
cations and the operating and safety informa-  
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.  
112  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Attachment points for upper  
retaining strap  
Warning  
Icon  
Meaning  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used  
for the child restraint system, the protective  
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-  
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided  
to the upper attachment point without twist-  
ing and not over sharp edges.  
The respective icon shows the  
attachment point for the upper  
retaining strap. Seats with an  
upper top tether are marked  
with this icon. It is located on  
the rear seat backrest, the rear  
shelf or the rear seat.  
Warning  
Routing the retaining strap  
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the  
protective effect of the child restraint system  
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,  
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of  
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold  
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to  
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests  
are locked.  
Warning  
1
Driving direction  
Head restraint  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attachment point  
Rear shelf  
Seat backrest  
Upper retaining strap  
Attaching the upper retaining strap  
to the attachment point  
1. Open the attachment point cover.  
2. If necessary, raise the head restraint.  
3. Guide the upper strap between the head  
restraint rods, or along both sides of the  
head restraint rods, to the attachment  
point.  
113  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the  
attachment point.  
5. Tighten the retaining strap.  
114  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Overview  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Start/Stop button  
Start/Stop button  
Principle  
Pressing the Start/Stop button turns drive-  
ready state on/off.  
Auto Start/Stop function  
General information  
Manual transmission: Drive-ready state turns  
on when the clutch pedal is pressed while  
pushing the Start/Stop button.  
Principle  
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.  
The system switches off the engine during a  
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic  
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.  
The engine starts automatically for driving off.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission: Drive-ready  
state turns on when the brake is pressed while  
pushing the Start/Stop button.  
Pressing the Start/Stop button again turns  
drive-ready state back off and turns standby  
state back on.  
General information  
The Auto Start/Stop function switches to  
standby whenever the engine is started using  
the Start/Stop button.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 43.  
Standby state, refer to page 42.  
The function is activated at low speeds.  
Engine stop  
Functional requirements  
The engine is switched off automatically when  
stopping under the following conditions:  
Manual transmission:  
115  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is  
not pressed.  
The total time is automatically reset every time  
the vehicle is refueled.  
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-  
er's door is closed.  
Functional limitations  
The engine does not switch off automatically in  
situations like the following:  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
▷
The selector lever is in selector lever posi-  
tion D.  
▷
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.  
Brake pedal was not depressed hard  
enough.  
▷
The brake pedal remains depressed while  
the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is  
held by Automatic Hold.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the ambient temperature is high and  
automatic climate control is switched on.  
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-  
er's door is closed.  
Vehicle interior has not yet been heated or  
cooled as desired.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
Manual engine stop  
If the engine was not switched off automati-  
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can  
be switched off manually:  
When window condensation is possible and  
automatic climate control is switched on.  
Engine or other components are not at op-  
erating temperature.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.  
Vehicle battery is deeply discharged.  
At higher elevations.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal forcefully again  
from the current pedal position.  
▷
Engage selector lever position P.  
The hood is unlocked.  
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,  
the engine switches off.  
For stop-and-go traffic.  
After driving in reverse.  
Air conditioning system when the  
engine is switched off  
Wheels are at a sharp angle or steering  
wheel is being turned.  
The air flow from the air conditioning system is  
reduced when the engine is switched off.  
▷
▷
M Steptronic Sport transmission: Selector  
lever position in S or R.  
Selector lever position is S or R.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Starting the engine  
The display in the instrument  
cluster indicates that the Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
an automatic engine start.  
Functional requirements  
The engine starts automatically under the fol-  
lowing preconditions:  
Manual transmission:  
Indications on the control display  
▷
By pressing the clutch pedal.  
Total time with switched-off engine  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
The total time for which the Auto Start/Stop  
function has switched off the engine is dis-  
played in the trip data.  
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.  
When Automatic Hold is activated: step on  
the accelerator pedal.  
116  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
If this function is deactivated while the engine  
is being stopped automatically, the engine will  
start.  
Driving off  
Accelerating as usual after starting the engine.  
Safety mode  
After the engine switches off automatically, it  
will not start again automatically if any one of  
the following conditions are met:  
Via button  
▷
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is open.  
▷
Hood was unlocked.  
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied  
length of time.  
The engine can only be started using the Start/  
Stop button.  
Press the button.  
▷
LED is illuminated: Auto Start/Stop  
function is deactivated.  
System limits  
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-  
tivated engine starts up automatically in the  
following situations:  
▷
LED off: Auto Start/Stop function is ena-  
bled.  
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle interior is extremely hot when the  
cooling is on.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission: via  
selector lever position  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also disabled  
in selector lever position S.  
Vehicle interior is extremely cold when the  
heating is on.  
When window condensation is possible and  
automatic climate control is switched on.  
Using the M1/M2 buttons on the  
steering wheel  
The Auto Start/Stop function can be acti-  
vated/deactivated using the M1 or M2 buttons  
on the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
In case of a steering operation.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
When changing selector lever position from  
D or P.  
▷
▷
In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-  
tery.  
Additional information:  
M Setup menu, refer to page 183.  
When starting an oil level measurement.  
Switching off the vehicle during an  
automatic engine stop  
Deactivating the system manually  
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle  
can be parked safely, for example to leave it.  
Principle  
In certain driving situations, e.g., traffic jams,  
it may be helpful to deactivate Auto Start/  
Stop manually. The engine will then no longer  
switch off automatically.  
Manual transmission:  
1. Press the Start/Stop button.  
117  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
Standby state is switched on.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
2. Shift into first gear or reverse gear.  
3. Set the parking brake.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
1. Press the Start/Stop button.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
Standby state is switched on.  
Selector lever position P is engaged au-  
tomatically.  
NOTICE  
2. Set the parking brake.  
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive RPM  
can damage the engine. There is a risk of  
property damage. When shifting into 5th or  
6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.  
Automatic deactivation  
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-  
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-  
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.  
Shift pattern  
Malfunction  
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer  
switches off the engine automatically. A Check  
Control message is displayed. You may con-  
tinue driving. Have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Manual transmission  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
1–6: forward gears.  
R: reverse gear.  
Shifting  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Gear Shift Assistant  
When the Gear Shift Assistant is activated, the  
rpm will be adjusted automatically during a  
shifting operation for a fast gear change.  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
The Gear Shift Assistant can be deacti-  
vated/activated via the M Setup menu.  
Additional information:  
118  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
M Setup menu, refer to page 183.  
Safety information  
Reverse gear  
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,  
e.g., by applying the parking brake.  
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift  
lever dynamically to the left and engage re-  
verse gear with a forward shifting movement.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without  
its own drive, for instance in a car wash, or be  
pushed.  
Overview  
Selector lever  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a  
forward gear or reverse.  
3. Release the parking brake.  
M Steptronic Sport  
transmission  
General information  
The M Steptronic Sport transmission is oper-  
ated via the selector lever or the two shift pad-  
dles on the steering wheel.  
Selector lever functions  
Icon  
Function  
DriveLogic modes.  
Reverse gear.  
Neutral.  
The following functions are available:  
▷
Various driving programs: Drive mode or  
sequential mode.  
R
N
▷
▷
▷
▷
Low Speed Assistant.  
Center position, forward posi-  
tion.  
Various Drivelogic programs.  
Launch Control.  
-
Downshifting, manual.  
Upshifting, manual.  
Upshifting display, Shift lights.  
+
D/S  
Drive mode or sequential  
mode.  
P
Parking.  
119  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Selector lever positions  
Engaging a selector lever position  
D is Drive mode  
General information  
Selector lever position for driving. All gears for  
forward travel are activated automatically.  
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you  
select a gear position or reverse gear, main-  
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are  
ready to drive off.  
S is Sequential mode  
The engaged selector lever position is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster and on the  
selector lever.  
Selector lever position for driving. All gears for  
forward travel must be shifted manually.  
R is reverse  
Engage selector lever position R only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
In certain situations, e.g., to rock free on snow,  
it is possible to shift between reverse gear and  
gear position D without pressing the brake.  
Functional requirements  
N Neutral  
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on  
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible  
to change from selector lever position P to an-  
other selector lever position.  
In selector lever position N, the vehicle may be  
pushed or roll without power, for instance, in  
car washes.  
P Park  
Engaging selector lever position D/S,  
N, R  
Selector lever position, for instance for parking  
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive  
wheels in selector lever position P.  
Engage selector lever position P only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally in situations such as the following:  
▷
▷
▷
After the drive-ready state or standby state  
is switched off and selector lever position  
D/S or R is engaged.  
After the standby state has been switched  
off when selector lever position N is en-  
gaged.  
With the driver's seat belt fastened, press on  
the brake pedal and pull or push the selector  
lever in the required direction. The selector  
lever automatically returns to the center posi-  
tion when released.  
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled, the driv-  
er's door is opened, and the brake pedal is  
not pressed while the vehicle is stationary  
and the selector lever is set to D/S or R.  
In selector lever position R, the selector lever  
locks.  
120  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
In this way, standby state remains switched  
on, and a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
Engaging selector lever position P  
The vehicle can roll.  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally after approximately 35 minutes.  
If the system is not operational, you may not  
be able to change the selector lever position.  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if  
needed.  
Press button P.  
Additional information:  
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,  
refer to page 125.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
Kickdown  
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum drive  
power in Drive mode.  
General information  
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to  
roll without its own drive for a short distance,  
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.  
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-  
sistance point at the full throttle position.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
Drive mode D/S  
Principle  
NOTICE  
In Drive mode, all forward gears are automati-  
cally changed.  
Selector lever position P is automatically en-  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of  
property damage. Do not switch off standby  
if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car  
wash.  
Activating Drive mode  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing  
on the brake pedal.  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.  
3. If necessary, deactivate Automatic Hold.  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 128.  
4. If necessary, loosen the belt.  
5. If necessary, open the door.  
Push the selector lever out of the center posi-  
tion in the D/S direction.  
6. Depress the brake pedal.  
Drive mode is activated. The engaged gear is  
displayed in the instrument cluster along with a  
D, e.g., 1 D.  
7. Engage selector lever position N.  
8. Switch off drive-ready state.  
121  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Deactivating Drive mode  
Deactivating sequential mode  
Push the selector lever out of Drive mode  
in the D/S direction. Sequential mode is acti-  
vated.  
Push the selector lever out of the center po-  
sition in the D/S direction. Drive mode is acti-  
vated.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, e.g., 1.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster along with a D, e.g., 1 D.  
Sequential mode D/S  
Gear change  
Principle  
Principle  
In sequential mode, it is possible to shift gears  
manually using the selector lever or the shift  
paddles without letting off the gas.  
Manual gear-shifting is possible via the shift  
paddles or the selector lever in sequential  
mode.  
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow  
you to change gears quickly while keeping  
both hands on the steering wheel.  
General information  
Shortly before falling below a gear-dependent  
minimum speed, the transmission is automati-  
cally downshifted.  
General information  
Once the maximum engine speed is attained,  
upshifting is not automatically performed in  
sequential mode and the kickdown is deacti-  
vated.  
Shifting  
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine  
and road speeds; for instance, downshifting is  
not possible if the engine speed is too high.  
It is also possible to drive off in 2nd gear;  
for instance, on icy roads.  
The lowest possible gear is selected by simul-  
taneously operating the kickdown and moving  
the selector lever forward or actuating the left  
shift paddle.  
Activating sequential mode  
Temporary sequential mode  
After a shift paddle is actuated in Drive mode,  
the system temporarily switches to sequential  
mode.  
After conservative driving in sequential mode  
without acceleration or shifting via the shift  
paddles for a certain amount of time, the  
transmission switches back to Drive mode.  
Push the selector lever out of Drive mode in  
the D/S direction, arrow 1, or shift via the selec-  
tor lever, arrows at 2.  
Permanent sequential mode  
Sequential mode remains permanently active if  
it was active before the shift paddle was actu-  
ated.  
Sequential mode is activated. The engaged  
gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g.,  
1.  
122  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Switching to Drive mode  
Sequential mode  
It is possible to switch to Drive mode as fol-  
lows: pull and hold the right shift paddle.  
▷
▷
▷
Gear shift indicator, arrow 1.  
Engaged gear, arrow 2.  
Selected Drivelogic program,  
arrow 3.  
Switching via the selector lever  
▷
Upshifting: pull the selector lever rear-  
wards.  
Notice  
▷
Downshifting: press the selector lever for-  
ward.  
When the outside temperature is very low, the  
display may not work. Current driving direction  
is recognizable at the engaged selector lever  
position.  
A shift in Drive mode causes a switch to Se-  
quential mode.  
Switching via the shift paddles  
Low Speed Assistant  
Principle  
The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at  
very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking  
speed.  
General information  
Use the Low Speed Assistant for maneuvering  
or in stop-and-go traffic.  
▷
▷
Upshift: pull right shift paddle.  
Downshift: pull left shift paddle.  
The Low Speed Assistant can also be used  
for rocking the vehicle free in the snow. To do  
this, change over between reverse gear and  
forward gear without stepping on the brakes in  
the process.  
Display on the selector lever  
The actually engaged transmission position  
can deviate from the selector lever position in  
some situations. The display in the selector  
lever flashes.  
Activating  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing  
on the brake pedal.  
Observe the display in the instrument cluster in  
these cases.  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.  
3. If necessary, deactivate Automatic Hold.  
4. Engage selector lever position D/S or R.  
5. Release brake.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Drive mode  
In 1st and 2nd gear and in reverse, the vehicle  
rolls at minimum speed.  
▷
▷
Engaged gear together with  
a D, arrow 1.  
Selected Drivelogic program,  
arrow 2.  
Deactivating  
Decelerate the vehicle to a stop.  
123  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Selecting a DriveLogic program  
Drivelogic  
Via the rocker switch on the selector lever  
Principle  
Drivelogic changes the gear-shifting character-  
istics of the M Steptronic Sport transmission.  
For example, the shifting points are changed in  
Drive mode and the shifting times in sequential  
mode.  
General information  
Three Drivelogic programs are available.  
Whenever you switch between Sequential  
mode and Drive mode, the last program se-  
lected is enabled.  
Press the rocker switch repeatedly until  
the desired DriveLogic program is dis-  
played on the instrument cluster.  
If drive-ready state is switched on after the ve-  
hicle has been idle, DriveLogic program D1 is  
enabled in Drive mode.  
Via iDrive  
The desired DriveLogic program can be con-  
figured for buttons M1, M2, or M Setup.  
Drivelogic programs  
Pro-  
gram  
Drive mode  
Sequential  
mode  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2  
CONFIGURATION"  
Efficient driving.  
Comfortable  
shifting opera-  
tions.  
D1/S1  
3. "Drivelogic"  
4. Select the desired DriveLogic mode.  
Fast driving.  
Sporty, fast shift-  
ing operations.  
D2/S2  
D3/S3  
The setting is immediately applied with ac-  
tive M1 or M2 configuration.  
Sporty driving.  
Maximum shift-  
ing speed,  
Launch Control.  
To activate the desired configuration with the  
selected settings, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the steering wheel:  
▷
▷
Additional information:  
M Setup menu, refer to page 183.  
124  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Launch Control  
The DriveLogic program se-  
lected corresponds to the num-  
ber of illuminated fields.  
Principle  
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration  
on roads with good traction under dry sur-  
rounding conditions.  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
General information  
The use of Launch Control causes premature  
component wear since this function represents  
a very heavy load for the vehicle.  
General information  
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-  
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a  
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.  
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.  
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving  
off with Launch Control.  
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank  
the engine.  
Additional information:  
Break-in, refer to page 253.  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the  
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-  
ing away.  
Functional requirements  
Launch Control is available when the engine  
is at operating temperature. The engine is at  
operating temperature after an uninterrupted  
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter  
must audibly start. Press the Start/Stop  
button and hold.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
3. With your free hand, press and hold the se-  
lector lever in selector lever position N, until  
selector lever position N is displayed in the  
instrument cluster.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
4. Release the Start/Stop button and selector  
lever.  
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter  
stops.  
▷
▷
Arrows 1: Function has been activated.  
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous  
area and secure it against rolling away.  
Arrow 2: Function is being used for maxi-  
mum acceleration.  
Additional information:  
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 310.  
125  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
A destination flag is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Starting with launch control  
Manual transmission  
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. With  
sufficiently high starting torque, the Launch  
Control is active.  
2. Activate M Dynamic Mode.  
M Dynamic Mode (MDM), refer to  
page 190.  
An appropriate Check Control message is  
displayed.  
3. Step on the clutch pedal.  
4. Engage first gear.  
Now release the brake. The vehicle acceler-  
ates.  
5. Press the accelerator pedal all the way  
down.  
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as  
the destination flag is displayed and the ac-  
celerator pedal is not released.  
A destination flag is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Preparing Launch Control. An appropriate  
Check Control message is displayed.  
Repeated use during a trip  
After Launch Control has been used, it is  
necessary to drive a certain distance before  
Launch Control can be used again. Launch  
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions,  
when used again.  
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.  
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. With  
sufficiently high starting torque, the Launch  
Control is active.  
An appropriate Check Control message is  
displayed.  
After using Launch Control  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
Disengage the clutch quickly within approx.  
6 seconds. The vehicle accelerates.  
7. Observe the Shift lights and upshift on time.  
System limits  
Manual transmission: if drive-off is delayed,  
the Launch Control is automatically terminated  
to protect the engine.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
2. Deactivate the Dynamic Stability Control.  
The best acceleration figures are reached with  
sport tires at operating temperature.  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 188.  
An experienced driver may be able to achieve  
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.  
3. Select sequential mode with gear 1 and  
Drivelogic program S3.  
4. With your left foot, forcefully press down on  
the brake.  
Drive-off assistant  
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal  
beyond the resistance point at the full throt-  
tle position, kickdown.  
Principle  
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on  
uphill grades.  
Preparing Launch Control. An appropriate  
Check Control message is displayed.  
126  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Driving off  
1. Hold the vehicle by depressing the brake  
pedal.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
2. Release the brake pedal and drive off  
quickly.  
After the brake pedal is released, the vehicle is  
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.  
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle  
may roll back slightly.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
In order to prevent rolling back when driving  
off, use the parking brake.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
1.  
Pull and release switch before driv-  
Releasing the parking brake.  
ing off.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
The parking brake is set.  
2. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to  
drive off.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
Parking brake  
Principle  
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-  
cle from rolling away when it is parked.  
Overview  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Parking brake  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
127  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Releasing the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive off.  
Setting the parking brake  
With a stationary vehicle  
Pull the switch.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The LED illuminates.  
Malfunction  
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-  
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away  
before you exit.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red.  
The parking brake is set.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
While driving  
Use while driving serves as an emergency  
braking function.  
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of  
the vehicle.  
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle  
brakes hard while the switch is pulled.  
After a power interruption  
To reestablish parking brake operability after  
a power interruption, an initialization may be  
required.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,  
and the brake lights illuminate.  
1. Turn on standby state.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The parking brake is engaged when the vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
2.  
Pull the switch while stepping on the  
brake pedal or selector lever position P is  
set and then push.  
Releasing the parking brake  
This process may take a few seconds. Some  
mechanical sounds associated with this proc-  
ess are normal.  
Releasing the parking brake manually  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
The indicator light is no longer illumi-  
nated as soon as the parking brake is  
ready for operation again.  
2.  
Manual transmission: press the  
switch while the brake pedal is depressed.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
press the switch while the brake is de-  
pressed or selector lever position P is set.  
M Steptronic Sport  
transmission: Automatic  
Hold  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The parking brake is released.  
Principle  
Automatic Hold provides assistance by auto-  
matically applying and releasing the brake,  
128  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
e.g., when driving off on inclines or in stop-  
and-go traffic.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
The vehicle is automatically held in place when  
it is stationary.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
General information  
The parking brake is automatically engaged  
under the following conditions:  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
▷
▷
If drive-ready state is turned off.  
If the driver’s door is opened while the vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
▷
If the parking brake is used to brake the  
vehicle to a stop while driving.  
NOTICE  
Safety information  
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold  
engages the parking brake and prevents the  
vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is  
a risk of property damage. Deactivate Auto-  
matic Hold prior to entering the car wash.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Overview  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Automatic Hold  
Activating Automatic Hold  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
2.  
Press the button.  
The LED illuminates.  
129  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
Automatic Hold is activated.  
Automatic Hold is deactivated.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,  
also press the brake pedal when deactivating.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s  
door is closed.  
Drive system  
After stopping, the vehicle is automat-  
ically secured against rolling away as  
soon as the indicator light illuminates  
green.  
Principle  
The drive’s response to movement of the ac-  
celerator pedal can be adjusted. The intensity  
of the drive acoustics changes depending on  
the program.  
Automatic parking brake application  
Overview  
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-  
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is  
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle  
is exited.  
Button in the vehicle  
The indicator light changes from green  
to red.  
The parking brake is not set automatically if  
the drive-ready state was switched off while  
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated in this case.  
Driving off  
SETUP  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
The brake is released automatically and the  
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer  
illuminated.  
Programs  
The vehicle may roll back slightly when driving  
off, depending on the load.  
Program  
Response characteristics  
Efficient, comfortable.  
Sporty, dynamic.  
"EFFICIENT"  
"SPORT"  
Use the parking brake as needed to prevent  
the vehicle from rolling back when driving off.  
"SPORT PLUS Spontaneous, direct. Maxi-  
mum dynamics.  
Deactivate Automatic Hold  
"
Press the button.  
The LED goes out.  
When Sound Control is on, the SPORT and  
SPORT PLUS programs change the intensity  
of the drive acoustics.  
The indicator light goes out.  
Additional information: Sound Control, refer to  
page 131.  
130  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Selecting a program  
Overview  
Using the button  
Button in the vehicle  
Press the button and select the desired  
program on the control display.  
Via iDrive  
Drive settings can be configured in M Setup.  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 183.  
Sound control  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When the display for M Setup is acti-  
vated in the instrument cluster, the se-  
lected program is displayed.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
Additional information:  
Using the button  
Central display area, refer to page 144  
Press button to activate or deactivate  
the sound control.  
Sound control  
Depending on the equipment, a Check Control  
message is displayed when the Sound Control  
is turned on or an LED will illuminate in the  
button.  
Principle  
The sound control function changes the sound  
characteristics of the exhaust system.  
Via iDrive  
The Sound Control settings can be configured  
in M Setup.  
General information  
When sound control is switched on, the sound  
of the exhaust system takes on a sporty na-  
ture.  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 183.  
When sound control is switched off, the sound  
is focused on comfort.  
During the engine warm-up phase, sound con-  
trol does not have any effect on the sound of  
the exhaust system.  
Additional information:  
High-performance engine, refer to page 252.  
131  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
M MODE, refer to page 185.  
Vehicle features and options  
Safety information  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Warning  
If the driving information displays on the in-  
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,  
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Imme-  
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.  
Turning drive-ready state off and on again  
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to  
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be  
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Instrument cluster  
Principle  
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-  
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,  
temperature as well as indicator and warning  
lights.  
Overview  
General information  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
The view on the instrument cluster can vary  
depending on the selected driving mode. The  
driving mode is set using the M MODE button.  
The following M MODE views are available:  
▷
▷
▷
"ROAD": standard view of the instrument  
cluster for comfort-oriented driving. All dis-  
plays for driver assistance systems and col-  
lision warning systems are enabled.  
Instrument cluster  
Display ranges on the instrument  
cluster  
The contents of the instrument cluster are  
shown using the standard view as an example.  
This view is displayed in the following driving  
mode:  
"SPORT": M View to assist a sporty driv-  
ing style. The displays for driver assistance  
systems and collision warning systems are  
reduced to a minimum.  
Depending on the equipment:  
"TRACK": M View for driving on a race  
track. The driver assistance and collision  
warning system displays are deactivated.  
"ROAD"  
Additional information:  
132  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Operating elements on the steering  
wheel  
Operating  
element  
Function  
Display the menu bar on the  
instrument cluster.  
Press the corresponding arrow  
key to move the selection.  
1
Speedometer  
2
Driver assistance systems 195  
Parking assistance systems 211  
Digital speedometer 141  
Shift lights 144  
Turn knurled wheel: scroll se-  
lection up or down.  
3
4
5
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten-  
tion Camera  
Settings  
6
Manual transmission: transmission display  
118  
Specific displays can be configured individu-  
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission: gear dis-  
play with Drivelogic 124  
1.  
Apps menu  
Gear shift indicator 142  
Tachometer 142  
2. "Vehicle"  
7
3. "Displays"  
8
9
Outside temperature 143  
Engine oil temperature 143  
4. "Instrument cluster"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
10 Driving stability control systems 183  
11 Central display range 144  
Check Control 135  
Live Vehicle  
Selection lists 141  
Principle  
M Drift Analyzer 192  
12 Speed Limit Info 195  
Speed Limit Assistant 208  
13 Fuel gauge 147  
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your  
vehicle with different information, e.g., vehicle  
status or current driving condition.  
General information  
14 Range 148  
Corresponding information is shown on the  
control display depending on the driving situa-  
tion. Fault statuses are not taken into account.  
Adaptive content or various static content can  
be selected.  
15 Time 147  
Additional information:  
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 136.  
133  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 317.  
Adaptive content  
The following content is displayed in alternat-  
ing order and, if necessary, depending on the  
selected drive mode:  
Overview  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 148.  
Current driving condition, refer to page 149.  
Sport displays, refer to page 149.  
Trip data, refer to page 145.  
Adjusting the display  
In the Live Vehicle menu, adaptive content or  
various static content for the display can be  
selected on the left-hand side bar:  
Head-up display views are projected onto the  
windshield through a protective glass. The pro-  
tective glass is located between the steering  
wheel and windshield.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Live Vehicle"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Displayable information  
The following information is displayed on the  
Head-up display depending on the driving  
mode selected:  
BMW Head-up display  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle speed.  
Principle  
Navigation instructions.  
Check Control messages.  
Tachometer.  
The Head-up display projects important infor-  
mation, e.g., speed, onto the windshield in the  
driver's field of view. Information can be re-  
corded without you having to look away from  
the road.  
Selector lever display.  
Lists and messages.  
Driver assistance systems.  
The steering wheel buttons can be used to  
configure various views for the Head-up dis-  
play. More settings can be configured on the  
control display, e.g., brightness, height, or rota-  
tion.  
Some of this information is only displayed  
briefly as needed.  
Configuring a view  
The views for the Head-up display can be set  
independently of the display on the instrument  
cluster, e.g., a reduced view.  
General information  
The views on the Head-up display adjust au-  
tomatically depending on the selected driving  
mode.  
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up  
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
Additional information:  
134  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up  
display is influenced by the following factors:  
2. "HEAD-UP"  
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on  
the steering wheel where applicable.  
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Objects on the Head-up display's protective  
glass.  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
▷
Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-  
tective glass.  
Turning the Head-up display on/off  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.  
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.  
Wet road.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
Unfavorable light conditions.  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Head-up display"  
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-  
tings checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Settings  
Various settings can be configured for the  
Head-up display, e.g., height, brightness, or  
rotation. In addition, individual displays in the  
Head-up display can be set up separately such  
as for Driver Assistance.  
Special windshield  
The windshield is part of the system.  
The shape and coating of the special wind-  
shield enable the system to function.  
1.  
Apps menu  
If damaged, have the special windshield re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Check Control  
Setting the view  
Additional settings can be applied depending  
on the driving mode selected and the Head-up  
display configuration.  
Principle  
The Check Control system monitors functions  
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the  
monitored systems.  
1. "MENU"  
A Check Control message is displayed as  
a combination of indicator lights or warning  
lights and text messages on the instrument  
cluster and, if applicable, on the Head-up dis-  
play. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound  
and a text message may appear on the control  
display.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Some Check Control messages are hidden au-  
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they  
will be stored. Stored Check Control messages  
135  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
can be displayed on the control display. Urgent  
Check Control messages are permanently dis-  
played but may be hidden temporarily.  
Icons in the instrument cluster indicate  
an active or saved Check Control mes-  
sage.  
Hiding Check Control messages  
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-  
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-  
sages are automatically displayed again after  
approx. 8 seconds.  
An arrow icon next to the Check Control  
message indicates whether the Check Control  
message can be hidden.  
Indicator lights and warning  
lights  
To hide Check Control messages, press  
the left arrow button on the steering  
wheel.  
Principle  
The indicator lights and the warning lights on  
the instrument cluster show the status of some  
functions in the vehicle. The indicator lights  
and warning lights indicate faults in monitored  
systems.  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
Additional information such as the cause of a  
fault or the required action can be called up via  
Check Control.  
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-  
ther help can be selected.  
General information  
Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-  
nate in a variety of combinations and colors.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Several of the lights are checked for proper  
functioning and illuminate temporarily when  
drive-ready state is turned on.  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Check Control"  
5. Select the desired text message.  
Red lights  
Display  
Seat belt reminder  
A Check Control message is displayed in the  
instrument cluster as a text message with an  
icon.  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not  
buckled.  
Additional information:  
For urgent messages, an added text is auto-  
matically displayed on the control display.  
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 101.  
If several faults occur at once, the messages  
are displayed consecutively.  
Airbag system  
Certain messages displayed while driving are  
displayed again after drive-ready state is  
switched off.  
Warning light illuminates briefly: indi-  
cates that the entire airbag system and  
seat belt tensioners are operational  
when drive-ready state is switched on.  
136  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates  
continuously: the airbag system or the seat  
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have  
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Forward Collision Warning  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.  
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-  
neuver.  
Additional information:  
Airbags, refer to page 162.  
Additional information:  
Parking brake  
Forward Collision Warning with braking func-  
tion, refer to page 170.  
The parking brake is set.  
Additional information:  
Active Cruise Control with Distance  
Control  
Parking brake, refer to page 127.  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-  
sary.  
Brake system  
The brake pads are worn or there is  
another issue with the brake system.  
Additional information:  
The braking assistance may not be op-  
erational. A higher pedal force may be  
required for braking.  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-  
fer to page 202.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Yellow lights  
Antilock Braking System  
Pedestrian Warning  
The system may not be operational.  
The Antilock Braking System is not  
available.  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with a person, e.g., a pedestrian  
or a cyclist. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
The ability to steer may be restricted  
during full braking.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a person, e.g., a pe-  
destrian or a cyclist. Immediately initiate brak-  
ing or an evasive maneuver.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 183.  
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, refer  
to page 171.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
137  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-  
ing style to the road conditions.  
area of the interference, the system auto-  
matically becomes active again.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability  
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.  
▷
▷
▷
In the case of tires with special appro-  
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable  
to complete the reset. Reset the system  
again.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:  
Have it checked by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop as needed.  
Additional information:  
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 188.  
Dynamic Stability Control deactivated  
Additional information:  
The Dynamic Stability Control is deac-  
tivated or the M Dynamic Mode is acti-  
vated.  
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 275.  
Steering system  
Additional information:  
The steering system may not be op-  
erational.  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 188.  
Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
▷
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 190.  
Flat tire monitor  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Exhaust emissions  
▷
The warning light illuminates:  
Reduce your speed and stop cau-  
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering  
maneuvers.  
The exhaust gas quality is declining,  
e.g., because the fuel filler cap is  
fitted incorrectly. Have the vehicle  
checked as soon as possible.  
Additional information:  
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 281.  
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-  
cumstances:  
Tire pressure monitor  
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-  
ing in the engine.  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Follow the information in the Check  
Control message.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-  
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-  
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-  
riod can seriously damage emission control  
components, in particular the catalytic con-  
verter.  
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-  
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot  
be detected.  
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with  
the same radio frequency: after leaving the  
138  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
Low-beam headlights are switched on  
and the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant is activated.  
Additional information:  
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to  
page 299.  
High-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the traffic sit-  
uation.  
M Traction Control  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 152.  
Indicator light flashes: M Traction Con-  
trol level is changed.  
Additional information:  
Lane departure warning  
M Traction Control, refer to page 191.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version:  
Green lights  
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-  
tem is switched on. At least one lane boundary  
has been detected on one side of the vehicle.  
The system is ready to intervene and issue  
warnings. The system can perform steering in-  
terventions.  
Turn signal  
Turn signal is on.  
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator  
light indicates that a turn signal bulb  
has failed.  
Indicator light flashes: the system is perform-  
ing a steering intervention.  
Additional information:  
Turn signal, refer to page 151.  
Additional information:  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 172.  
Parking lights  
Automatic Hold is activated  
Parking lights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
After stopping, Automatic Hold auto-  
matically secures the vehicle to prevent  
it from rolling away.  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 154.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 128.  
Low-beam headlights  
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Automatic Hold secures the stopped  
vehicle to prevent it from rolling away,  
e.g., when stopped at a traffic light.  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 154.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 128.  
139  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
the speed limit has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-  
tem is switched on.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 208.  
The indicator light flashes: the set  
speed limit has been exceeded.  
Additional information:  
Blue lights  
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 197.  
High-beam headlights  
High-beam headlights have been  
switched on.  
Cruise Control  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
High-beam headlights, refer to page 151.  
Cruise control, refer to page 199.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 152.  
Active Cruise Control with Distance  
Control  
Gray lights  
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has  
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-  
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been  
detected ahead of you.  
Seat belt reminder  
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-  
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.  
Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle has  
driven off.  
Additional information:  
Seat belts, refer to page 100.  
Additional information:  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-  
fer to page 202.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
The system is interrupted.  
Speed Limit Assistant activated  
Additional information:  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the  
indicator light illuminates green, to-  
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to  
page 197.  
gether with the icon for a speed control  
system. Speed Limit Assistant is active and  
detected speed limits can be applied manually  
for the displayed system.  
Cruise Control  
The system is interrupted.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 208.  
Cruise control, refer to page 199.  
Speed Limit Assist: Apply speed limit  
The detected speed limit can be ap-  
plied with the SET button. As soon as  
140  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Active Cruise Control with Distance  
Control  
Adjusting the unit  
Depending on the national-market version, it  
may be possible to set the unit for the digital  
tachometer.  
Indicator light is illuminated: the system  
is interrupted.  
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are  
not adequate for the system to work. The sys-  
tem was deactivated but applies the brakes  
until you actively resume control by pressing  
on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Units"  
5. "Distance"  
Additional information:  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-  
fer to page 202.  
Selection lists  
White lights  
Principle  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used  
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or  
the Head-up display.  
No Distance Control because accelera-  
tor pedal is being pressed.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-  
fer to page 202.  
Current audio source.  
List of most recent telephone calls.  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open  
on the control display.  
M Traction Control  
M Traction Control level display.  
Additional information:  
Displaying and using the list  
The selection lists can be displayed and op-  
erated using the operating elements on the  
steering wheel.  
M Traction Control, refer to page 191.  
Digital tachometer  
General information  
The digital speedometer is permanently dis-  
played in all driving modes. The speed cur-  
rently driven is displayed.  
141  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Example: changing the entertainment  
source  
Operating  
elements  
Function  
Turn the knurled wheel: dis-  
play the entertainment list or  
scroll up or down in the list.  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
button.  
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
2.  
To select an entertainment source,  
turn the knurled wheel.  
Press the corresponding arrow  
key to change the entertain-  
ment source.  
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected entertainment source.  
Show list of most recent tele-  
phone calls.  
Gear shift indicator  
Display  
Principle  
The shift point indicator recommends the gear  
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-  
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-  
ing style.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the gear shift indicator is active  
in sequential mode of the M Steptronic Sport  
transmission and with manual transmission.  
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
Display  
Example: selecting a radio station  
Icon  
Description  
Shift up to the most fuel efficient  
gear.  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
button.  
2.  
To switch to the list of radio sta-  
tions, tilt the knurled wheel to the right.  
Tachometer  
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio  
station.  
General information  
The engine has a permissible rotational speed  
range. Excessive speeds are indicated by a  
yellow prewarning field and a red warning field.  
The permissible speed increases as the engine  
oil temperature increases.  
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected radio station.  
142  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In  
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect  
the engine.  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the bar dis-  
play is in the middle of the temperature dis-  
play.  
Display  
The tachometer display changes depending  
on the selected driving mode.  
Hot engine: the bar display is in the up-  
per temperature range. In addition, a Check  
Control message is displayed.  
Reduced rotational speed range  
Additional information:  
The available rotational speed range may be  
reduced due certain factors such as a cold  
drive system. The tachometer display is auto-  
matically adjusted depending on the available  
rotational speed range.  
Coolant level, refer to page 295.  
Display  
▷
Cold engine: the bar display  
is in the blue temperature  
range.  
Standby state and drive-  
ready state  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the bar dis-  
play is in the middle of the temperature dis-  
play.  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
Hot engine: the bar display is in the up-  
per temperature range. In addition, a Check  
Control message is displayed.  
READY is displayed in the  
instrument cluster. The Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
automatic engine start.  
Additional information:  
Coolant level, refer to page 295.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
Additional information:  
▷
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to  
page 41.  
A red indicator light is displayed.  
▷
Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 115.  
Outside temperature  
Engine oil temperature  
▷
Cold engine: the bar display  
is in the blue temperature  
range.  
General information  
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a  
signal sounds.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.  
143  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
When the vehicle is stationary or at low speed,  
the temperature displayed may differ slightly  
from the actual outside temperature due to ex-  
ternal environmental influences.  
Shift lights in the instrument cluster  
Safety information  
Warning  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on  
bridges or shady sections of the road. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-  
age. Modify your driving style to the weather  
conditions at low temperatures.  
The Shift lights are shown on the instrument  
cluster in the following situations:  
The Head-up display is deactivated or the fol-  
lowing drive mode is activated: "ROAD".  
Shift lights in the Head-up display  
Shift lights  
Principle  
Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at  
which optimal acceleration can be achieved.  
General information  
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate  
the upcoming shift point.  
The shift lights, arrow 1, are displayed above  
the tachometer, arrow 2.  
Shift when all fields illuminate red at the latest.  
When the maximum rotational speed is  
reached, the entire display flashes and the fuel  
supply is interrupted in order to protect the en-  
gine.  
The shift lights are shown on the Head-up dis-  
play in the following driving modes:  
▷
▷
"SPORT"  
Depending on vehicle equipment: "TRACK"  
Functional requirement  
If the vehicle is equipped with an M Steptronic  
Sport transmission, sequential mode must be  
selected to display the shift lights.  
Central display range  
Displayable content  
The following settings are available depending  
on the driving mode selected:  
▷
▷
▷
Reduced display.  
Trip data, refer to page 145.  
Navigation system route preview.  
144  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Navigation system map view.  
M Setup, refer to page 183.  
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on  
the steering wheel where applicable.  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
Information on the systems configured us-  
ing the SETUP button.  
▷
▷
Engine data.  
Information on the coolant temperature and  
boost pressure of the turbocharger can be  
displayed.  
Trip data  
Principle  
Tire data.  
The trip data display provides various informa-  
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption  
or trip distance.  
Information on wheels and tires can be dis-  
played.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Sport displays, refer to page 149.  
G-Meter, refer to page 147.  
Entertainment.  
General information  
The trip data can be displayed on the control  
display and in the instrument cluster.  
Android Auto©.  
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle  
menu, the trip data is shown on the control  
display.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, select functions of  
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-  
played, e.g., map views.  
The values can be displayed and reset de-  
pending on different intervals.  
Some contents for the central display range  
can also be configured as a view in the Head-  
up display.  
Display on the control display  
Additional information:  
General information  
The following trip data is shown on the control  
display:  
Head-up display, refer to page 134.  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
▷
▷
Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
Average fuel consumption depending  
on the configured interval.  
Configuring the central display  
range  
The content of the central display range on the  
instrument cluster can be configured individu-  
ally, for instance the trip data display.  
▷
▷
Travel time depending on the config-  
ured interval.  
Distance traveled depending on the  
configured interval.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
Displaying trip data continuously  
wheel.  
1.  
Apps menu  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Live Vehicle"  
4. "Content"  
5. "Trip data"  
2. "CONTENT"  
145  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The trip data is displayed.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Information on consumption and distance cov-  
ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
2. Press button repeatedly until the desired  
setting is displayed.  
Via iDrive:  
▷
▷
▷
Current consumption, arrow 1.  
Average consumption, arrow 2.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Distance traveled depending on the config-  
ured interval, arrow 3.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Time period for trip data"  
5. "Values"  
▷
Total mileage, arrow 4.  
6. Select the desired setting:  
Current consumption  
▷
▷
▷
▷
"Since start of trip": the values are auto-  
matically reset approx. four hours after  
the vehicle has come to a standstill.  
The current fuel consumption display allows  
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,  
to drive economically and in an environmen-  
tally-friendly manner.  
"Since last refuel": the values are au-  
tomatically reset after refueling with a  
larger quantity of fuel.  
Average consumption  
The average fuel consumption is displayed de-  
pending on how the intervals for displaying trip  
data are configured.  
"Since factory": the values since the  
time of the factory delivery are dis-  
played.  
"Since Individual": the values since the  
last manual reset are displayed. The  
values can be reset at any time.  
Adjusting the display of the trip data  
The intervals for the display of the trip data  
in the instrument cluster and on the control  
display are adjustable.  
Resetting average values manually  
The following interval can be reset manually at  
any time:  
Using the button on the left steering column  
switch:  
"Since Individual ( )"  
1. Press the button.  
Using the button on the left steering column  
switch:  
1. Press the button.  
146  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The trip data is displayed.  
Manually reseting G-Meter values  
1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument  
cluster.  
2.  
Press and hold the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel until the values are  
reset.  
Date and time  
2. Press and hold the button until the values  
are reset.  
Various settings can be applied for the date  
and time display such as the date format.  
Via iDrive:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the time zone can be set or  
automatic time zone enabled. With automatic  
time setting, the time, date and, if necessary,  
the time zone are updated automatically.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Time period for trip data"  
5. "Reset Individual"  
1.  
Apps menu  
The average values and counters are reset.  
Once the average values and counters have  
been reset, the following interval is automati-  
cally activated:  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. Select the desired settings.  
"Since Individual ( )"  
Fuel gauge  
G-Meter  
Principle  
General information  
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-  
played.  
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-  
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction  
on the vehicle occupants while driving.  
General information  
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to  
vary.  
The display can be configured on the central  
display range of the instrument cluster.  
The values are automatically reset whenever  
you start a new drive.  
Additional information:  
Refueling, refer to page 260.  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 144  
147  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Display  
An arrow beside the fuel pump  
icon shows which side of the ve-  
hicle the fuel filler flap is on.  
The current range is displayed  
as a numerical value next to the  
fuel gauge.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
Setting the units of  
measurement  
The yellow indicator light illuminates,  
once the fuel reserve is reached.  
Depending on the national-market version, you  
can set the units of measurement for some  
values, for instance consumption, distances,  
and temperature.  
Range  
1.  
Apps menu  
Principle  
2. "Vehicle"  
The range indicates the distance that can still  
be covered with the current tank of fuel.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Units"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
General information  
The estimated range with remaining fuel is  
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Vehicle status  
With a low remaining range, a Check Control  
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining  
range means that engine functions cannot al-  
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when  
cornering at speed.  
General information  
The status can be displayed and actions per-  
formed for several systems such as for Check  
Control.  
The Check Control message appears  
continuously below a range of approx.  
30 miles/50 km.  
Displaying vehicle status  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Safety information  
3. "Vehicle status"  
NOTICE  
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the  
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.  
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.  
There is a risk of property damage. Refuel  
promptly.  
148  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Display  
Icon  
Description  
"FLAT TIRE MONITOR": Sta-  
tus of the flat tire monitor, refer  
to page 281.  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status  
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,  
refer to page 275.  
"Engine oil level": electronic  
oil measurement, refer to  
page 293.  
An example:  
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-  
cle decelerates.  
"Check Control": displaying  
stored Check Control mes-  
sages, refer to page 135.  
Sport displays  
"Service": display of the service  
notifications, refer to page 150.  
Principle  
The Sport displays especially support a sporty  
driving style.  
Current driving condition  
Functional requirements  
General information  
The current driving condition is displayed dy-  
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle  
menu on the control display.  
▷
One of the following driving modes is se-  
lected:  
▷
▷
"SPORT"  
Depending on vehicle equipment:  
"TRACK".  
The following states can be displayed:  
▷
▷
Driving.  
▷
The following setting is selected for Live  
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"  
"CHARGING BATTERY"  
Indicators on control display  
The sport displays are displayed in the Live  
Vehicle menu on the control display.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The following driving mode is selected:  
"ROAD"  
The following information is displayed:  
▷
For Live Vehicle, select the following set-  
ting: "Adaptive content".  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Torque.  
Power.  
Boost pressure.  
Engine oil temperature.  
149  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Service"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Sport displays can be shown in the central dis-  
play area of the instrument cluster. Sport dis-  
plays include information on power and torque.  
5. "Vehicle inspection"  
6. "Date:"  
Additional information:  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Central display area, refer to page 144  
Service  
Principle  
The service notifications indicate recom-  
mended maintenance work.  
General information  
After turning on, the next service appointment  
or the distance remaining until the next servic-  
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
A service advisor can read out the mainte-  
nance work from the vehicle key.  
Display  
More information may be displayed on the  
control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Service"  
Maintenance measures as well as legally  
mandated inspections are displayed.  
5. Select the desired entry.  
Entering appointment dates  
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can  
be entered.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are  
set correctly.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
150  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. "One-touch turn signal"  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Brief flashing  
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold  
it there for as long as you want the turn signal  
to flash.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
High-beam headlights,  
headlight flasher  
Turn signal  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.  
When driving and during operation of the turn  
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold  
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal  
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.  
Flashing  
▷
▷
High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.  
The high-beam headlights illuminate when  
the low-beam headlights are switched on.  
High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,  
arrow 2.  
Press the lever past the resistance point.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates when the high-beam  
headlights are turned on.  
One-touch signaling  
Lightly tap the lever up or down.  
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-  
justed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
151  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
The headlights are automatically changed be-  
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam  
headlights.  
Principle  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects  
other road users early on and automatically  
switches the high-beam headlights on or off  
depending on the traffic situation.  
The blue indicator light in the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-  
tem switches on the high-beam head-  
lights.  
General information  
Interruption of the journey with activated Au-  
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant remains activated when  
continuing the journey.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures  
that the high-beam headlights are switched  
on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the  
low speed range, the high-beam headlights  
are not switched on by the system.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti-  
vated when manually switching the high-beam  
headlights on and off.  
The system responds to light from oncoming  
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to  
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-  
ies.  
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.  
The high-beam headlights can be switched on  
and off manually at any time.  
Deactivating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
Functional requirements  
▷
Automatic headlight control is activated.  
▷
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Activating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant  
General information  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant can be adjusted.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
152  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions  
such as fog or heavy precipitation.  
Safety information  
When detecting poorly-lit road users such  
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders  
and wagons; when driving close to train or  
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.  
Warning  
If adjustments have been made or the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic  
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. If  
adjustments have been made and the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, make sure that  
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.  
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-  
ually if required.  
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,  
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-  
ing traffic on highways.  
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-  
ence of highly reflective signs.  
When the windshield in the area in front  
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or  
covered with stickers, etc.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Setting at standstill only.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Light is turned off.  
Exterior lighting  
Overview  
Increasing sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-  
proximately 10 seconds.  
Buttons in the vehicle  
A Check Control message is displayed. The  
system responds more sensitively.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front again  
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-  
ready state.  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.  
Icon  
Function  
Exterior lighting off.  
System limits  
Daytime driving lights.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot  
replace the driver's personal judgment of when  
to use the high-beam headlights. When appro-  
priate, dim the high beams manually.  
Parking lights.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Adaptive lighting functions.  
The system may not be fully operational in  
the following situations, and driver intervention  
may be necessary:  
Low-beam headlights.  
153  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Function  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
Icon  
Instrument lighting.  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot re-  
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-  
tions.  
Right roadside parking light.  
Left roadside parking light.  
For example, the sensors are unable to detect  
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn  
the lights on manually.  
Buttons on the vehicle key  
Icon  
Function  
Parking lights, low-beam  
headlights and roadside  
parking lights  
Interior lighting.  
Parts of the exterior lighting.  
Pathway lighting.  
General information  
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-  
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting  
is automatically switched off after a period of  
time.  
Driving lights automatic  
Principle  
Parking lights  
The low-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the ambient  
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight  
or if there is precipitation.  
General information  
The parking lights can only be turned on at low  
speeds.  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  
cause the lights to be turned on.  
Turning on parking lights  
Press the button on the light switch.  
If the low-beam headlights are switched on  
manually, the automatic headlight control is  
deactivated.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
Activate automatic headlight control  
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-  
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle  
battery and it would then be impossible to  
switch on drive-ready state.  
Press the button on the light switch.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
154  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Turning off parking lights  
Button Function  
The following options are available to turn off  
the parking lights:  
Right roadside parking light on.  
Left roadside parking light off.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the light switch.  
Turn on drive-ready state.  
After the drive-ready state is switched on,  
the automatic headlight control will be acti-  
vated.  
Switching off the roadside parking light:  
Press the button on the light switch or  
turn on drive-ready state.  
Low-beam headlights  
Turning on low-beam headlights  
Welcome lights  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Principle  
The low-beam headlights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
The welcome light turns on automatically for  
a limited period of time when approaching or  
unlocking the vehicle.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior  
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.  
Press the button again to switch on the low-  
beam headlights when the standby state is  
switched on.  
Activating/deactivating welcome  
light  
Turning off low-beam headlights  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
low-beam headlights can be turned off in the  
low speed range:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
▷
Press the button on the light switch.  
5. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-  
side parking light can be switched on.  
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"  
When unlocking the vehicle, individual  
lighting functions are turned on.  
155  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Turning on the welcome light  
Daytime driving lights  
▷
Automatically on approach.  
▷
During unlocking.  
General information  
The daytime driving lights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
with the vehicle locked.  
Activating/deactivating daytime  
driving lights  
In some countries, daytime driving lights are  
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-  
vate the daytime driving lights in front.  
Depending on the settings, the interior  
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will  
be turned on.  
The function is not available for the first  
10 seconds after locking.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Pathway lighting  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
Principle  
5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-  
tional-market version:  
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting  
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-  
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area  
surrounding the vehicle.  
▷
▷
"Daytime driving lights"  
"Rear daytime driving lights"  
Switching pathway lighting on  
Adaptive lighting functions  
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state,  
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.  
Principle  
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-  
lumination of the road.  
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.  
General information  
Setting the duration  
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of  
one system or multiple systems, depending on  
the equipment version:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
▷
▷
Adaptive Light Control.  
Cornering light.  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. "Pathway lighting"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Activating the adaptive lighting  
functions  
Press the button on the light switch.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
156  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
The adaptive lighting functions are active  
when the drive-ready state is switched on.  
Instrument lighting  
Functional requirement  
The brightness can only be adjusted when  
the parking lights or low-beam headlights are  
turned on.  
Adaptive Light Control  
General information  
Depending on the steering-wheel angle and  
other parameters, the light from the headlight  
follows the course of the road.  
Setting the brightness  
Adjust the brightness with the  
knurled wheel.  
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap-  
tive Light Control does not swivel to the oppo-  
site lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.  
Cornering light  
Interior lighting  
Principle  
General information  
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous  
roads or when turning, an additional cornering  
light is switched on that illuminates the inside  
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below  
a certain speed.  
Depending on the equipment version, interior  
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient  
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically  
controlled.  
Overview  
General information  
The cornering light is automatically switched  
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,  
where applicable, the use of turn signals.  
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights  
may be automatically switched on regardless  
of the steering-wheel angle.  
Adaptive headlight range  
control  
Reading lights  
Interior lights  
The adaptive headlight range control feature  
balances out acceleration and braking proc-  
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in  
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.  
157  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Turning interior lights on/off  
Selecting the color  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press the button.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Color"  
To switch off permanently: press the button  
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.  
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle  
can be switched on and off independently. The  
button is located in the rear headliner.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the brightness  
Turning reading lights on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press the button.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Brightness"  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-  
ing lights are located next to the interior lights  
in the front and rear.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Dynamic light  
Ambient light  
Individual actions, for example incoming calls  
or opened doors, are indicated by light effects.  
If the ambient light is disabled, the light effects  
are still displayed.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, lighting  
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's  
interior.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Dynamic light"  
Activating/deactivating ambient  
light  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Ambient lighting"  
Reduced for night drive  
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced  
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.  
Turning ambient light on/off  
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Reduced for night driving"  
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,  
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is  
unlocked.  
158  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Press the lever up until the desired position is  
reached.  
Window wiper system  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Rest position of the wipers, position 0.  
Rain sensor mode, position 1.  
Normal wiper speed, position 2.  
Fast wiper speed, position 3.  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
When the journey is interrupted with the win-  
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey  
continues, the wipers resume at their previous  
speed.  
Turning off the window wiper  
system and flick wipe  
NOTICE  
The wiper blades can wear out or become  
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry  
window for a longer period of time. The wiper  
motor can overheat. There is a risk of prop-  
erty damage. Do not use the wipers when the  
window is dry.  
Press the lever down.  
▷
Turning off: press the lever down until it  
reaches the 0 position.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
▷
Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0  
position.  
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-  
sition when released.  
Rain sensor  
Turning on window wiper system  
Principle  
The rain sensor automatically controls the  
wiper operation depending on the intensity of  
the rainfall.  
General information  
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-  
rectly in front of the interior mirror.  
159  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.  
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
Window washer system  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers  
can accidentally start moving in car washes.  
There is a risk of property damage. Deacti-  
vate the rain sensor in car washes.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Activating rain sensor  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window  
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only use the window washer  
system when the washer fluid will not freeze.  
Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.  
NOTICE  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,  
the washer pump cannot work as intended.  
There is a risk of property damage. Do not  
use the washer system when the washer  
fluid reservoir is empty.  
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-  
row 1.  
Wiping operation is started.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not  
start.  
Cleaning the windshield  
Deactivating rain sensor  
Press lever back into the 0 position.  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
Pull the lever.  
The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-  
shield directly in front of the wiper blade when  
the wiper moves upward.  
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity  
of the rain sensor.  
160  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Folding out the wipers  
1. Turn on standby state.  
Fold-out position of the wipers  
Principle  
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until  
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.  
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be  
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-  
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper  
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-  
tions.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the  
windshield.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
Folding in the wipers  
1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.  
2. Switch on standby state and press and  
hold the wiper lever down again.  
Wipers return to their rest position and are  
ready again for operation.  
161  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Airbags  
1
Front airbag, driver  
Front airbag, front passenger  
Head airbag  
4
5
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
2
3
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
protects the side of the body in the chest and  
lap area.  
The front airbag helps protect the driver and  
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact  
in which the seat belts alone would not provide  
adequate protection.  
The availability of the side airbag in the rear  
depends on the national-market version.  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
in the rear protects the chest and lap area on  
162  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
the side of the bodies of the occupants in the  
outer rear seats.  
▷
▷
Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the  
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low  
as possible when the airbag is deployed.  
Head airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag  
protects the head.  
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that  
hands can be crossed over the steering  
wheel. Select the settings so that the  
shoulder rests against the backrest when  
crossing the hands and the upper body  
is as far back as possible while still main-  
taining a comfortable grip on the steering  
wheel.  
Ejection Mitigation  
The head airbag system is designed as an  
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce  
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants  
through side windows during rollovers or side  
collision events.  
▷
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-  
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in  
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.  
Knee airbag  
The availability of the knee airbag depends on  
the national-market version.  
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads  
away from the side airbag.  
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event  
of a frontal impact.  
There should be no additional persons, an-  
imals or objects between an airbag and a  
person.  
Protective effect  
▷
▷
Dashboard and windshield on the pas-  
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-  
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not  
attach brackets or cables, for instance for  
navigation devices or mobile phones.  
General information  
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-  
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with  
adhesive, do not cover them or modify  
them in any way.  
Information on optimum protective  
effect of the airbags  
▷
▷
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on  
the passenger's side as a storage area.  
Warning  
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-  
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the  
airbag system cannot provide protection as  
intended and may cause additional injuries  
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Follow the information on  
achieving the optimum protective effect of the  
airbag system.  
Keep storage compartments near the air-  
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or  
center armrest.  
▷
▷
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,  
or other objects on the front seats unless  
they are specifically designed for seats with  
integrated airbags.  
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as  
jackets over the backrests.  
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Fasten the seat belts correctly.  
163  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Do not modify individual components or  
wiring. This also applies to steering wheel  
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When drive-ready state is turned on,  
the warning light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-  
cating the operational readiness of the entire  
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.  
Do not disassemble the airbag system.  
Even when you follow all instructions very  
closely, injury from contact with the airbags  
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead  
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary  
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
Malfunction  
▷
Warning light does not illuminate  
when drive-ready state is turned on.  
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-  
ities may affect the air bag system; contact  
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-  
tion.  
▷
The warning light illuminates con-  
tinuously.  
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-  
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle  
checked immediately by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Warnings and information on the airbags are  
also found on the sun visors.  
Operational readiness of the airbag  
system  
Setting the front seat positions  
The power that deploys the driver's/front  
passenger airbags depends on the position of  
the driver's/front passenger seat.  
Safety information  
Warning  
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-  
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-  
spective message appears on the control dis-  
play.  
Individual components can be hot after de-  
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk  
of injury. Do not touch individual components.  
Additional information:  
Seats, refer to page 95.  
Warning  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional deployment of  
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-  
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as  
intended despite the accident severity. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the  
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-  
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Automatic deactivation of  
front passenger airbag  
Principle  
The system reads if the front passenger seat  
is occupied by measuring the human body's  
resistance.  
The front passenger airbag is activated or de-  
activated.  
164  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light  
illuminates briefly and then indicates whether  
the airbag is activated or deactivated.  
General information  
Before transporting a child on the front pass-  
enger seat, refer to the safety information and  
instructions for children on the front passenger  
seat, see Children.  
▷
The indicator light illuminates  
when a child is properly  
seated in a child restraint  
system or when the seat is  
empty. The airbag on the  
front passenger's side is not  
activated.  
Safety information  
Warning  
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-  
tion, the system must be able to detect  
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-  
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be  
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Make sure that the front  
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-  
well.  
▷
The indicator light does not illuminate  
when, for instance, a correctly seated per-  
son of sufficient size is detected on the  
seat. The airbag on the front passenger's  
side is activated.  
Fault of the automatic deactivation  
system  
For adolescents and adults, the front pass-  
enger airbag may deactivate in certain seat  
positions. In this case, the indicator light for  
the front passenger airbag illuminates in the  
headliner.  
Functional requirements  
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied  
seat surface:  
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats  
or other items to the front passenger seat  
unless they are specifically determined to  
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.  
In this case, change the seat position so that  
the front passenger airbag activates and the  
indicator light goes out.  
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that  
can press against the seat from below.  
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have  
the person sit in the rear seat.  
Do not place any electronic devices on the  
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys-  
tem is to be installed on it.  
Detected child restraint systems  
The system generally detects children seated  
in a child restraint system, particularly in child  
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the  
point in time when the vehicle was manufac-  
tured. After installing a child restraint system,  
make sure that the indicator light for the front  
passenger airbag illuminates. This indicates  
that the child restraint system has been de-  
tected and the front passenger airbag is not  
activated.  
▷
No moisture in or on the seat.  
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag  
The front passenger airbag indicator light in  
the headliner indicates the operating state of  
the front passenger airbag.  
The light indicates whether the airbag is acti-  
vated or deactivated.  
165  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Sensors  
Collision warning systems  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-  
gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-  
lowing sensors:  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has  
different systems that can help prevent the risk  
of imminent collision.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-  
tervention, refer to page 167.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Lane departure warning, refer to page 172.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to  
page 175.  
Turning on/turning off collision  
warning systems  
Depending on national-market version, some  
of the systems are automatically activated  
whenever you start driving.  
▷
Rear-end collision preparation, refer to  
page 177.  
Safety information  
The following functions are adjustable.  
M MODE: The warning time setting cannot be  
changed in SPORT driving mode or, depend-  
ing on vehicle equipment, in TRACK driving  
mode.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. Select the desired settings.  
M MODE: the various driving modes affect the  
availability of the collision warning systems.  
Some collision warning systems are deacti-  
vated depending on the driving mode selected.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Additional information:  
M Mode, refer to page 185  
Resetting the settings  
The settings of the collision warning systems  
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle  
outbound delivery.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
166  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
3. "Driving settings"  
avoided, the system can help reduce the se-  
verity of the accident.  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
The system can issue a warning of a possible  
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-  
pendently, if needed.  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Reset to recommended settings"  
System limits  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the For-  
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the  
following functions:  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function, refer to page 170.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, re-  
fer to page 171.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Detection capability  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
Warning  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Forward Collision Mitigation  
with brake intervention  
Principle  
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help  
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be  
167  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed  
successively on the control display.  
Sensors  
Depending on the equipment, the system is  
controlled by the following sensors:  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
7. "Off"  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Speed range  
The system issues a warning of a possi-  
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
Setting the warning time  
1.  
Apps menu  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Some functions are deactivated earlier.  
The system is enabled as soon as the speed  
drops below these values again.  
Turning the Forward Collision  
Mitigation on/off  
The more sensitive the warning time is set to  
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The  
system can therefore also issue more early or  
unfounded warnings and reactions.  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The following indicator lights and warning  
lights are shown on the instrument cluster and,  
depending on vehicle equipment, on the Head-  
up display:  
Turning on system manually  
The system is activated by setting the warning  
time.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Additional information:  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
Setting the warning time, refer to page 168.  
Turning system off manually  
Depending on national-market version, the ad-  
justment can only be made when the vehicle is  
at a standstill or in a very low speed range.  
Risk of collision, for instance with a  
preceding vehicle.  
The corresponding indicator lights and warn-  
ing lights may display differently if the system  
detects multiple objects.  
168  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
A brake intervention can be canceled by de-  
pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient  
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively  
steering.  
Warning function  
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-  
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-  
spective hazardous situation.  
City brake function: the brake intervention oc-  
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.  
In the event of a prewarning, a warning light  
illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-  
ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning  
tone sounds.  
With radar sensor: the brake intervention oc-  
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.  
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,  
only a brief brake intervention will occur.  
In the event of a system warning, the driver  
must intervene immediately and in accordance  
with the situation.  
System limits  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Red warning light illuminates:  
A hazardous situation has been detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Safety information  
Red warning light flashes:  
Warning  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
A warning signal sounds:  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
Automatic brake intervention:  
Depending on the equipment and situation  
in case of risk of imminent collision, the  
system can also intervene with an auto-  
matic brake intervention and automatically  
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a  
complete stop.  
Detection capability  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and  
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle  
is used.  
Automatic brake intervention  
In case of a risk of collision, the system can  
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if  
necessary.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,  
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Manual transmission: during a brake interven-  
tion up to a complete stop, the engine may be  
shut down.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic  
Stability Control activates automatically.  
169  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-  
tions occur less frequently.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
With limitation of the driving stability control  
systems.  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitigation  
when towing.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Forward Collision Warning with a de-  
tected vehicle.  
Forward Collision Warning  
with braking function  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Principle  
The Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function is a warning function that notifies the  
driver of a possible risk of collision and brakes  
automatically as necessary.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 167.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
General information  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
or only detected with a delay, for instance:  
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings  
may vary with the current driving situation.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily. As soon as the speed drops below  
this value again, the system is reactivated.  
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-  
dling when responding. If an active driving  
170  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Daytime Pedestrian  
Collision Mitigation  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 167.  
Principle  
The Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation is  
a warning function that notifies the driver of a  
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and  
cyclists and brakes automatically as neces-  
sary. The system issues warnings for speeds  
that are common in towns and cities.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Detection range  
General information  
The detection range in front of the vehicle is  
divided into two areas:  
▷
Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the  
vehicle.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
▷
Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and  
left of the central area.  
The system issues a warning of a possible  
risk of collision with pedestrians or cyclists at  
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
There is a risk of collision if persons, e.g.,  
pedestrians or cyclists, are located within the  
central area. A warning is issued about pedes-  
trians who are located within the extended  
area only if they are moving in the direction of  
the central area.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe-  
destrian or cyclist, a warning light is displayed.  
▷
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
171  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate Do not jerk the steering  
wheel in response to a warning.  
Upper speed limit  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
system responds to pedestrians and cyclists  
when your vehicle speed is less than approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Warning  
Lane Departure Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Principle  
The lane departure warning alerts when the  
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the  
lane.  
General information  
Functional requirement  
The camera must detect the lane boundaries  
for the lane departure warning to be active.  
The areas of the sensors must be clean and  
clear.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
The system issues a warning starting at a min-  
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-  
specific and displayed on the control display.  
Turning the Lane Departure  
Warning on/off  
Various warning functions from this system  
help the driver keep their vehicle in their lane.  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
The system does not provide a warning if the  
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-  
fore exiting the lane.  
Safety information  
Turning on system manually  
The system is activated by setting the warning  
time.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
road and traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
Additional information:  
Setting the warning time, refer to page 173.  
172  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
Turning system off manually  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, you must successively confirm  
the switch-off on the control display.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Depending on the national-market  
version: turning steering intervention  
on/off  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. "Off"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. "Steering intervention"  
Setting Lane Departure Warning  
Setting the warning time  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention is automatically active af-  
ter every driving off.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Different system statuses are displayed on  
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle  
equipment and national-market version.  
▷
▷
▷
"Early"  
Icon  
Meaning  
"Medium"  
"Reduced"  
Indicator light illuminates green: Sys-  
tem is switched on. At least one lane  
boundary has been detected on one  
side of the vehicle. The system is  
ready to intervene and issue warn-  
ings. The system can perform steer-  
ing interventions.  
Some warnings are suppressed de-  
pending on the situation, for instance  
when purposely driving over lane mark-  
ings in curves or with dynamic passing  
without a turn signal.  
Indicator light flashes green: System  
is performing a steering intervention.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Apps menu  
Warning function  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
General information  
Different warnings are issued by the Lane De-  
parture Warning system, depending on situa-  
tion and speed:  
173  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
Indicator lights and warning lights on the  
instrument cluster.  
End of warning  
For instance, the warning or an active steering  
intervention will be canceled in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
▷
Vibration of steering wheel.  
Steering intervention.  
Warning tone.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.  
When returning to your own lane.  
With hard accelerating or braking.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
When flashing.  
Steering wheel vibration  
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary  
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates  
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration  
setting.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-  
responding direction before changing the lane,  
a warning is not issued.  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
Steering intervention  
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.  
Depending on the equipment and the national-  
market version: if a lane marking is crossed in  
the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the  
system intervenes with a brief active steering  
intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys-  
tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle  
within the lane. The steering intervention can  
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be  
manually overridden at any time.  
When another driver assistance system is  
activated, if applicable.  
▷
▷
No lane boundaries detected.  
When the system limits are reached.  
Warning signal  
A warning tone sounds if the driver does  
not actively steer after the Lane Departure  
Warning system has performed multiple active  
steering interventions within three minutes.  
During an active steering intervention, a light is  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
▷
A short warning tone will sound after the  
second steering intervention.  
For instance, the steering intervention will be  
suppressed in the following situations:  
▷
A longer warning tone will sound following  
the third steering intervention.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.  
When flashing.  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
In driving situation with high driving dynam-  
ics.  
The warning tone and Check Control message  
advise the driver to pay closer attention to their  
lane.  
▷
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
The longer warning tone is stopped if the  
driver takes control of the steering.  
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
When actively merging back to your own  
lane after passing.  
174  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and  
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a  
minimum speed.  
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and  
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection  
menu.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
The system indicates whether there are vehi-  
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching  
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The  
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates  
dimly.  
▷
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Before you change lanes after setting the turn  
signal, the system issues a warning in the  
situations described above. The warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering  
wheel vibrates.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warning  
light also illuminates, depending on national-  
market version.  
When turning at a speed of up to approx.  
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not  
vibrate.  
Active Blind Spot Detection  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Principle  
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles  
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from  
behind in the adjacent lane.  
Sensors  
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives  
warnings at different levels.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
175  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement  
Warning function  
The areas of the sensors must be clean and  
clear.  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection  
on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
Prewarning  
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror  
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot  
or approaching from the rear.  
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot  
Detection  
Setting the warning time  
1.  
Apps menu  
Acute warning  
When an acute warning occurs, the steering  
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the  
exterior mirror flashes brightly.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
An acute warning is issued if the following con-  
ditions are met:  
▷
▷
▷
Another vehicle is located in the critical  
area.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Your own vehicle is approaching the other  
lane.  
Depending on the system setting when the  
turn signal is turned on.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The warning stops when the other vehicle has  
left the critical area or the turn signal has been  
turned off.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Warning light flashing  
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing  
purposes.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
176  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-  
hicle.  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.  
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a  
certain speed, the system can react as follows:  
Displaying warnings  
The number of warnings shown depends on  
how the settings are configured. However,  
there may also be an excess of unwarranted  
warnings of critical situations.  
▷
Where applicable, the hazard warning  
flashers will be switched on.  
▷
Where applicable, the PreCrash functions  
are triggered.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
Sensors  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
The system is controlled by the radar sensors  
on the sides and rear.  
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warning  
light also illuminates, depending on national-  
market version.  
Turning rear-end collision  
preparation on/off  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
The system is deactivated when reversing.  
Rear-end collision  
preparation  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-  
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-  
hind.  
177  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Functional limitations  
This function may be restricted if the speed  
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or  
similar to your own speed.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the radar sensors  
on the sides at the rear.  
Cross Traffic Warning  
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic  
Warning  
The system must be activated on the control  
display for the Cross Traffic Warning to switch  
on automatically.  
Principle  
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of  
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-  
proaching from the side are detected sooner  
by the cross traffic warning than is possible  
from the driver's seat.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
General information  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
▷
▷
"Rear warning"  
"Front and rear warning"  
Turning on the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
The system must be activated on the control  
display. The system turns on automatically as  
soon as Park Distance Control or a camera  
view activates and you engage a gear position.  
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by  
sensors.  
The system indicates approaching road users.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is  
switched on.  
Safety information  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active when the vehi-  
cle is started.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
Turning off the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
The system is automatically turned off in the  
following situations:  
178  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: display in  
camera image  
When a certain distance covered is ex-  
ceeded.  
Warning function  
General information  
The control display shows the corresponding  
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-  
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-  
ror flashes.  
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the  
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-  
tected by the sensors.  
Visual warning  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your  
own vehicle.  
Acoustic warning  
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone  
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-  
spective direction.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
signal tone will already sound when the gear  
position is engaged.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes  
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when  
the vehicle is reversing.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Display in the Park Distance Control view  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Functional limitations  
The function can be limited, for instance in the  
following situations:  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow  
or a very fast speed.  
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-  
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are  
detected by the sensors.  
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in  
the capture range of the sensors.  
179  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Depending on the equipment and require-  
ments, the following individual functions are  
active in accident-critical driving situations:  
Active Protection  
Principle  
Active Protection prepares occupants and the  
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving  
or collision situations.  
▷
Automatic closing of the windows.  
The windows remain open with a small  
gap.  
▷
▷
Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.  
The sun protection is also closed.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Active Protection consists of  
various PreCrash functions.  
Automatic positioning of the backrest for  
the front passenger seat.  
The system is used to detect certain critical  
driving situations that might lead to an acci-  
dent. This includes the following critical driving  
situations:  
Systems can be returned to the desired set-  
tings following a critical driving situation with-  
out accident.  
▷
▷
▷
Emergency braking.  
Severe understeering.  
Severe oversteering.  
PostCrash iBrake  
Principle  
Certain functions of several systems can,  
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-  
tion triggering:  
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash  
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a  
standstill without intervention by the driver.  
▷
▷
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function: automatic brake intervention.  
General information  
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a  
further collision and its consequences.  
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function: brake booster.  
Rear-end collision preparation: detection of  
impending rear-end collisions.  
At standstill  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released  
automatically.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Harder vehicle deceleration  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, critical situations might not be  
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk  
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
In certain situations, it may be necessary to  
bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly than  
automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake.  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the  
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher  
than the brake pressure generated by auto-  
matic braking. Automatic braking with Post-  
Crash iBrake is canceled.  
180  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Personal driving style, for instance steering  
behavior.  
Abort automatic braking  
It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash  
iBrake automatic braking in certain situations,  
e.g., when making an evasive maneuver.  
Driving conditions, for instance time, length  
of trip.  
This function activates at speeds greater than  
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display  
a break recommendation.  
Abort automatic braking:  
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly  
longer.  
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for  
slightly longer.  
Setting break recommendation  
The break recommendation can be switched  
on, off and adjusted via iDrive.  
Fatigue alert  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Principle  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Fatigue Alert"  
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation fea-  
ture can detect when the driver is fatigued  
or less alert during long, monotonous trips,  
for instance on highways. This function recom-  
mends taking a break.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Despite this function being off, some driver as-  
sistance systems may issue break recommen-  
dations.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Display  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Make  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,  
a message is displayed in the control display  
with the recommendation to take a break.  
During the display, various settings can be se-  
lected.  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after  
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation  
can only be displayed again after this time has  
elapsed.  
Break recommendation  
System limits  
Function  
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If  
the system is limited, either no warning may  
be issued or an unwarranted warning may be  
issued.  
Once a drive is started, this function is trained  
to the driver, enabling it to detect when the  
driver is less alert or is fatigued.  
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-  
ing criteria into account:  
The break recommendation function may be  
limited in the following situations:  
181  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.  
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during  
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.  
In active driving situations such as when  
changing lanes frequently.  
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.  
In the event of strong side winds.  
182  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
The brake assistant automatically applies  
maximum braking assistance when the brake  
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the  
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.  
Additional information:  
To make full use of braking assistance, do not  
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during  
full braking.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Antilock Braking System  
M Setup  
Principle  
Principle  
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking  
of the wheels during the braking process.  
The SETUP button is used to configure various  
driving dynamics and drive systems.  
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-  
ing full braking, which increases active driving  
safety.  
General information  
When the drive-ready state is switched on after  
the idle state, an efficient vehicle condition is  
active by default.  
General information  
The Antilock Braking System is ready after  
each time drive-ready state is turned on.  
Overview  
Malfunction  
Button in the center console  
The warning light on the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-  
ble.  
Steerability is limited during full braking.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
SETUP  
183  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Icon  
System  
"Auto Start/Stop": Auto Start/Stop  
function, refer to page 115.  
Button Function  
M1 configuration.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
"Drivelogic": shift modes and Drive-  
logic programs.  
M2 configuration.  
Drivelogic, refer to page 124.  
"DSC": Dynamic Stability Control, re-  
fer to page 188, and M Dynamic  
Mode, refer to page 190.  
Settings  
Icon  
System  
"M Sound": Sound Control, refer to  
page 131.  
"Engine": Drive, refer to page 130,  
programs.  
Manual transmission:  
Operation via SETUP  
"Gear Shift Assistant": RPM change  
at gear change.  
General information  
The settings from the SETUP button are ap-  
plied directly. The settings are not saved.  
Gear Shift Assistant, refer to  
page 118.  
"Chassis": programs of Adaptive M  
suspension, refer to page 225.  
Configuring M Setup  
"Steering": programs of Servotronic,  
refer to page 187.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Operation via M1/M2  
General information  
The settings for the driving dynamics and drive  
systems can be configured for the M1/M2 but-  
tons and retrieved if required.  
"Brake": programs of brake, refer to  
page 188.  
"M Traction Control": M Traction Con-  
trol, refer to page 191.  
The following systems can also be configured  
for M1/M2:  
With activated M1 or M2 configuration, any  
changes to the setting are immediately ap-  
plied.  
When M1/M2 is deactivated or reset, the driv-  
ing dynamics and drive systems are reset to  
their default settings.  
184  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Disabling M1/M2  
Press the corresponding button on the steering  
wheel.  
Warning  
Depending on the setting, Dynamic Stability  
Control may be restricted or not available  
when the M1 or M2 button is activated. There  
is a risk of accidents and risk of property  
damage. Note the settings for Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control in iDrive and take any necessary  
action. Modify your driving style and react, if  
necessary.  
Resetting M1/M2  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2  
CONFIGURATION"  
3. "Reset"  
4. "Reset M1 settings."  
To cancel resetting: "Cancel"  
Configuring M1/M2  
Display in the instrument cluster  
1.  
Press the button.  
Icon  
Description  
2. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2  
CONFIGURATION"  
Icon illuminates: corresponding  
configuration is activated.  
3. Select the desired setting.  
The individual settings are stored for the con-  
figuration currently in use.  
Alternatively, current system settings can be  
directly saved to M1 or M2. To do this, press  
and hold the desired button on the steering  
wheel until an acoustic signal sounds.  
Icon illuminates and "Function  
cannot currently be activated."  
appears: Configuration cannot  
be activated due to current  
driving situation.  
Activating M1/M2  
Press the corresponding button on the steering  
wheel:  
Reactivate configuration when  
the lettering is not illuminated.  
▷
Activate M1.  
M MODE  
▷
Activate M2.  
Principle  
Driver assistance and collision warning sys-  
tems can be adapted to the situation via M  
MODE.  
"M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2  
CONFIGURATION": If DSC OFF or M Dynamic  
Mode is set, a message is displayed on the  
instrument cluster. This message is confirmed  
by pressing the button again.  
The display on the instrument cluster and  
the Head-up display view change with the se-  
lected drive mode.  
185  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Overview  
The following driving modes are available:  
Button in the vehicle  
▷
▷
▷
"ROAD"  
"SPORT"  
Depending on the equipment: "TRACK"  
The view on the instrument cluster changes  
depending on the selected drive mode.  
Safety information  
Warning  
M MODE  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk  
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
Driving modes  
ROAD drive mode  
▷
All available collision warning systems are  
switched on.  
Warning  
▷
All available driver assistance systems are  
active.  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
ROAD drive mode is activated after drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
SPORT drive mode  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
systems are deactivated:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Lane departure warning.  
Manual Speed Limiter.  
Cruise control.  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.  
The vehicle automatically switches to ROAD  
driving mode when you activate certain sys-  
tems.  
Depending on vehicle equipment:  
TRACK driving mode  
In addition to the deactivated systems in  
SPORT drive mode, the following systems are  
deactivated, depending on vehicle equipment:  
186  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Speed Limit Info.  
Overview  
Forward Collision Mitigation.  
Active Blind Spot Detection.  
Button in the vehicle  
Rear-end collision preparation.  
Hazard flashing with hard braking right be-  
fore standstill is deactivated.  
▷
▷
Control display is switched off.  
The functions of the entertainment system  
are switched off.  
Selecting the driving mode  
ROAD and SPORT drive modes can only be  
enabled when drive-ready state is switched  
on.  
SETUP  
TRACK drive mode can only be enabled when  
the vehicle is stationary or driving at a very low  
speed.  
Programs  
Program  
Steering force tuning  
"COMFORT" Low steering forces, good  
roadway feedback.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
"SPORT"  
High steering forces, maxi-  
mum roadway feedback.  
In addition, the collision warning systems can  
be adjusted.  
Additional information:  
Selecting a program  
Collision warning systems, refer to page 167.  
Using the button  
Servotronic  
Press the button and select the desired  
program on the control display.  
Principle  
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power  
steering function.  
Via iDrive  
Servotronic settings can be configured in M  
Setup.  
The system provides the steering force with  
more support at low speeds than at higher  
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,  
and makes steering firmer when driving at  
faster speeds.  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 183.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Furthermore, the steering force adapts to the  
driving mode to convey a firm, sporty feel or a  
comfortable steering response.  
When the display for M Setup is acti-  
vated in the instrument cluster, the se-  
lected program is displayed.  
187  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 183.  
Central display area, refer to page 144  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When the display for M Setup is acti-  
vated in the instrument cluster, the se-  
lected program is displayed.  
Brake  
Principle  
The sensitivity of the brake pedal motions to  
the braking response can be adjusted.  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 144  
Overview  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Button in the vehicle  
Principle  
Dynamic Stability Control helps keep the vehi-  
cle on a steady course in critical driving situa-  
tions. The drive power is reduced depending  
on the situation, and wheels can be braked  
individually.  
General information  
The system detects the following unstable  
driving conditions, for instance:  
SETUP  
▷
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.  
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which  
can lead to understeering.  
Programs  
Safety information  
Program  
"COMFORT" Comfortable braking.  
"SPORT" Sensitive braking.  
Response characteristics  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Selecting a program  
Using the button  
Press the button and select the desired  
program on the control display.  
Via iDrive  
Brake settings can be configured in M Setup.  
Additional information:  
188  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
Warning  
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,  
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This  
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in  
critical driving situations. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Drive  
with roof load only with activated Dynamic  
Stability Control.  
3.  
Press the button again to reactivate  
Dynamic Stability Control.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the follow-  
ing programs can be displayed and selected  
immediately after disabling Dynamic Stability  
Control:  
▷
▷
M Traction Control, refer to page 191.  
M Drift Analyzer, refer to page 192.  
Overview  
Dynamic Stability Control settings can be con-  
figured in M Setup.  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 183.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
View when Dynamic Stability  
Control is deactivated.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic  
Stability Control is deactivated.  
Activating/deactivating Dynamic  
Stability Control  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to  
the driving circumstances.  
General information  
Dynamic Stability Control is automatically acti-  
vated whenever drive-ready state is switched  
on.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control has failed or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has  
failed.  
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-  
ing stability is limited when accelerating and  
cornering.  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Activating/deactivating the system  
1.  
Press the button to open the menu.  
Automatic program change  
Dynamic Stability Control can be activated au-  
tomatically by Forward Collision Mitigation de-  
2. "DSC OFF"  
189  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
pending on the situation. Deactivate Forward  
Collision Mitigation as necessary.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
Button in the vehicle  
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-  
vention, refer to page 167.  
M Dynamic Mode  
Principle  
M Dynamic Mode allows a ride with high longi-  
tudinal and lateral acceleration but with limited  
driving stability.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Only in the absolute limit range does the sys-  
tem intervene for stabilization by reducing the  
engine power and by brake interventions on  
the wheels. In this driving condition, additional  
steering corrections may be necessary.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
1.  
Press the button to open the selec-  
tion menu.  
2. "MDM"  
General information  
You may find it useful to briefly activate the  
system under the following special circumstan-  
ces:  
M Dynamic Mode is activated.  
▷
When rocking the vehicle free from deep  
snow or driving off from loose ground.  
3.  
Press the button again to reactivate  
Dynamic Stability Control.  
▷
With an increased need for dynamics or  
longitudinal acceleration, for instance when  
driving on a race track.  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control.  
Safety information  
Warning  
When M Dynamic Mode is activated, stabi-  
lizing interventions are carried out only to a  
reduced extent. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate Do not jerk the steering wheel in  
response to a warning.  
190  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Safety information  
Icon  
Description  
Warning  
Display active and indicator  
light illuminates:  
The deactivation of the Dynamic Stability  
Control limits the driving stability. Depending  
on the selected setting of M Traction Control,  
minor or major wheelspin is possible, which  
limits, e.g., lane keeping while accelerating.  
There is a risk of accidents and risk of prop-  
erty damage. Adjust driving style to traffic  
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate  
M Dynamic Mode is activated.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
warning light also flashes:  
M Dynamic Mode controls the  
driving and brake power.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Indicator and warning lights il-  
luminate:  
The M Dynamic Mode or the  
Dynamic Stability Control has  
malfunctioned.  
M Traction Control  
Principle  
SETUP  
M Traction Control permits the gradual adjust-  
ment of the wheel-slip behavior of the rear  
wheels during acceleration by regulating the  
driving power accordingly.  
Functional requirement  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
General information  
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated after  
an idle state, the M Traction Control level OFF/  
Level 0 is set.  
Additional information:  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 188.  
191  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Selecting settings  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
Using the button  
Display is active and indicator  
light illuminates:  
The Dynamic Stability Control  
is deactivated.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
warning light also flashes: M  
Traction Control is regulating  
the drive power.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "M Traction Control"  
M Traction Control level dis-  
play.  
3. Select the desired setting:  
▷
OFF/Level 0: support switched off.  
Wheels may spin strongly with severe  
oversteering.  
Indicator light flashes: M Trac-  
tion Control level is changed.  
▷
Level 10: maximum support. Wheels  
may spin slightly with slight oversteer-  
ing.  
M Drift Analyzer  
Via iDrive  
M Traction Control settings can be configured  
in M Setup.  
Principle  
The M Drift Analyzer detects and evaluates  
when the vehicle is moved in the drift.  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 183.  
General information  
For safety reasons, the use of the M Drift Ana-  
lyzer is only permitted outside of public road  
traffic and under suitable ambient conditions.  
Higher mechanical and thermal loads while  
drifting lead to increased wear. This wear is  
not covered by the warranty. Check the tire  
condition and the tire tread depth before driv-  
ing off.  
The data can be recorded as individual drifts or  
as total distance in a drift session.  
M Traction Control assists the driver depend-  
ing on the setting.  
192  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Using the button  
M Traction Control, refer to page 191.  
1.  
Press the button.  
Safety information  
2. "DSC OFF"  
3. "M Drift Analyzer"  
4. "Activate"  
5. Confirm message.  
Warning  
The deactivation of the Dynamic Stability  
Control limits the driving stability. Depending  
on the selected setting of M Traction Control,  
minor or major wheelspin is possible, which  
limits, e.g., lane keeping while accelerating.  
There is a risk of accidents and risk of prop-  
erty damage. Adjust driving style to traffic  
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate  
Via iDrive  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "M Drift Analyzer"  
4. "Activate"  
5. If necessary, "Activate anyway"  
Overview  
Set the M Traction Control level  
1.  
Apps menu  
Button in the vehicle  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "M Drift Analyzer"  
4. "M Traction Control"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Displays  
Indications on the control display  
The following information is shown on the con-  
trol display:  
Dynamic Stability Control  
▷
▷
Values from the last and best drift.  
Drift angle performance values.  
Activating/deactivating the system  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
The following icons are shown on the instru-  
ment cluster and, depending on vehicle equip-  
ment, on the Head-up display:  
General information  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated when  
the M Drift Analyzer is activated.  
The system detects independently when a sin-  
gle drift starts and ends.  
Deactivating M Drift Analyzer activates Stabil-  
ity Control and 4WD mode.  
193  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Description  
Assessment of the current drift.  
The number of stars that can  
be reached varies depending  
on the selected M Traction  
Control level.  
The better the drift, the more  
stars are filled out.  
Current drift is the best drift.  
M Drift Analyzer is activated.  
For an optimal drift, apply the  
accelerator pedal less.  
Reset the data  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "M Drift Analyzer"  
4. "Reset"  
Active M differential  
The active M differential provides for continu-  
ously variable locking of the rear axle differen-  
tial depending on the driving situation. This  
prevents an individual rear wheel from spin-  
ning even when the Dynamic Stability Control  
is turned off and in M Dynamic Mode, and thus  
enables optimum traction in all driving situa-  
tions.  
The driver is responsible adapting his or her  
driving style to the situation.  
194  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
6. "Speed warning"  
Vehicle features and options  
7. "Warning above:"  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
8. Select the desired setting.  
Applying current speed as the  
speed warning  
Additional information:  
1.  
Apps menu  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Speed warning"  
7. "Adopt current speed"  
Speed warning  
Principle  
The speed warning can be used to set a speed  
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed  
limit is exceeded.  
Speed Limit Info  
General information  
Another warning occurs when the set speed  
limit is exceeded again after it has dropped by  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
Speed Limit Info  
Principle  
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid  
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if  
necessary, the Head-up display.  
Activating/deactivating the speed  
warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
General information  
2. "Vehicle"  
The camera in the area of the interior mirror  
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as  
well as overhead sign posts.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Speed warning"  
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered  
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.  
The traffic sign will then be either displayed  
or ignored depending on the situation in the  
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.  
Adjusting the speed  
1.  
Apps menu  
The system may also show speed limits that  
apply to routes that are not signposted if the  
navigation system has current map data.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
195  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-  
rent map data for the country in which the ve-  
hicle is operated must be downloaded.  
Display  
Speed Limit Info  
For information on the current map version  
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-  
igation system chapter.  
Icon  
Description  
Current speed limit.  
Without map data, the system is subject to  
certain technical limitations. Traffic signs with  
speed limitations are detected and displayed  
only. Speed limits due to entering towns/cities,  
highway signs, etc., are not displayed. Speed  
limits with extra traffic signs are always dis-  
played.  
Depending on the national-  
market version, it is possible  
to switch between the units of  
measurement.  
No data on current speed limit  
available.  
Additional information:  
▷
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Speed Limit Info deactivated.  
Safety information  
Warning signals  
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal  
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded  
or the speed limit changes. The display also  
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Settings  
Individual settings can be configured for Speed  
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is  
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed  
changes.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
196  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
The system can limit the speed, starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven  
at any speed below the set speed limit.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
Camera, refer to page 37.  
Overview  
Functional limitations  
The system function may be limited and may  
provide incorrect information in the following  
situations:  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
System on/off.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed  
by objects, stickers, or paint.  
Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-  
ard.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
In areas that are not included in the naviga-  
tion system map data.  
If navigation system map data is invalid,  
outdated, or unavailable.  
Rocker switch:  
Changing the speed limit.  
When roads deviate from the navigation  
such as due to changes in road layout.  
Operation  
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Turning on the speed limiter  
When passing buses or trucks with traffic  
signs applied to them.  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.  
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-  
lel road are detected.  
The current speed is adopted as the speed  
limit.  
▷
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
If the system is turned on while the vehi-  
cle is stationary or driving at low speeds,  
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.  
The marking in the speedometer is set to the  
corresponding speed.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic  
Stability Control is switched on as necessary.  
Principle  
The Manual Speed Limiter can be used to set  
a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehi-  
cle from exceeding speed limits.  
Turning off the speed limiter  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
The system switches off automatically in the  
following situations, for example:  
197  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
When the engine is switched off.  
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.  
When Cruise Control is switched on.  
When activating certain driving modes.  
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down  
to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.  
When the vehicle speed drops below the set  
speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-  
vated.  
The displays turn off.  
Stopping the speed limiter  
If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the  
system is interrupted when rolling backwards.  
Warning when the speed limit is  
exceeded  
Changing the speed limit  
Visual warning  
If the speed limit is exceeded: the  
indicator light in the instrument clus-  
ter flashes while the vehicle speed is  
greater than the set speed limit.  
Acoustic warning  
▷
If the speed limit is exceeded unintention-  
ally, a signal sounds.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed limit is set.  
▷
When the speed limit is reduced to be-  
low the current vehicle speed, the signal  
sounds after some time.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
to the resistance point, the speed limit in-  
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
▷
When the speed limit is intentionally ex-  
ceeded by stepping on the accelerator  
pedal all the way down, there is no signal.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-  
ally exceeded such as when driving downhill,  
the vehicle is not actively braked.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
When the speed limit is set during a trip to  
a value below the current speed, the vehicle  
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.  
▷
▷
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive.  
The current speed can also be stored by  
pressing a button:  
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted.  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
No marking: system is  
switched off.  
Exceeding the speed limit  
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed  
limit, a warning is issued.  
198  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Indicator light  
Icon  
Description  
The indicator light illuminates: the  
system is switched on.  
Warning  
The use of the system can lead to an in-  
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-  
uations, for instance:  
The indicator light flashes: the set  
speed limit has been exceeded.  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.  
With high traffic volume.  
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet  
conditions, or on a loose road surface.  
Cruise Control without  
Distance Control  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only use the system if driving  
at constant speed is possible.  
Principle  
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-  
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-  
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as  
needed.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
General information  
The system can be activated starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Depending on the vehicle settings, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain  
conditions.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Safety information  
Button Function  
Cruise control on/off.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
Interrupt cruise control.  
199  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Stopping the system automatically  
Button Function  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations, for example:  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed.  
▷
Manual transmission:  
The clutch pedal is depressed for a few  
seconds or released if a gear is not en-  
gaged.  
Turning Cruise Control on/off  
The gear engaged is too high for the cur-  
rent speed.  
Turning on the system  
▷
▷
▷
M Steptronic Sport transmission: selector  
lever position D is disengaged.  
Depending on the equipment version,  
press the relevant button on the steer-  
ing wheel.  
While M Dynamic Mode is enabled or Dy-  
namic Stability Control is disabled.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Adjusting the speed  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
Turning off the system  
Depending on the equipment version,  
press the relevant button on the steer-  
ing wheel.  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted.  
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is  
deleted.  
When the system is switched on, the current  
speed is maintained and stored as the set  
speed.  
Interrupting Cruise Control  
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-  
ometer.  
Stopping the system manually  
When active, press the button.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a  
button.  
200  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Press the button.  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Changing the speed  
Press the button with the system inter-  
rupted.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and  
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the  
road is clear.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the  
resistance point, the set speed increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
The maximum speed that can be set de-  
pends on the vehicle.  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
▷
Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance  
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or  
decelerates without pressure on the accel-  
erator pedal.  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi-  
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the  
switch beyond the resistance point causes  
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.  
Indicator light  
Icon  
Description  
No indicator light: system is switched  
off.  
Continuing cruise control  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
201  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Safety information  
Some system information can also be dis-  
played in the Head-up display.  
Warning  
The icon is displayed when the set  
speed is reached.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
System limits  
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.  
Active Cruise Control with  
Distance Control  
Principle  
Warning  
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and  
a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted  
using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
General information  
The system maintains the set speed on clear  
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-  
matically.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system  
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set  
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.  
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-  
uation allows.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.  
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-  
tive speed.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-  
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-  
riod, the system is able to detect this within the  
given system limits.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Otherwise, drive off on your own such as by  
pressing the accelerator pedal or the rocker  
switch on the steering wheel.  
Depending on the vehicle settings, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain  
conditions.  
202  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Sensors  
Warning  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Risk of accident is greater when there is a  
high speed differential to other vehicles, for  
instance in the following situations:  
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-  
hicle at speed.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own  
lane.  
Application range  
The system is best used on well-maintained  
roads.  
When approaching stationary vehicles at  
speed.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate  
The minimum speed that can be set is  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
The maximum speed that can be set is limited  
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and  
the vehicle equipment.  
Overview  
The system can also be activated when sta-  
tionary.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control  
when towing.  
Button Function  
Cruise control on/off.  
Turning Cruise Control on/off or  
stopping it  
Store current speed.  
Turning on the system  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Interrupt cruise control.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
Increase the distance.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
Switch Distance Control on/off.  
Reduce distance.  
Turning off the system  
Switch Distance Control on/off.  
To switch off the system while stationary, step  
on brake pedal at the same time.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed.  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
203  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is  
deleted.  
Adjusting the speed  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
Stopping the system manually  
When enabled, press the button on the  
steering wheel.  
If interrupting the system while stationary,  
press on the brake pedal at the same time.  
Stopping the system automatically  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations:  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted. The system will be  
activated.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.  
The current speed is maintained and stored as  
desired speed.  
While M Dynamic Mode is enabled or Dy-  
namic Stability Control is disabled.  
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-  
ometer.  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
When the vehicle is stationary, the seat  
belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is  
opened.  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a  
button.  
▷
The system has not detected objects for  
an extended period, for instance on a  
road with very little traffic without curb or  
shoulder markings.  
Press the button.  
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-  
paired, for instance by contamination or  
heavy precipitation.  
Changing the speed  
After a longer stationary period when the  
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the  
system.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and  
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the  
road is clear.  
204  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the  
resistance point, the set speed increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Continuing cruise control  
Warning  
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the  
action.  
Adjusting the distance  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Press the button on the steering wheel  
with the system interrupted.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, deceleration can be late. There  
is a risk of accidents and risk of property  
damage. Be aware of the surrounding traffic  
situation at all times. Adjust the distance to  
the traffic and weather conditions and main-  
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly  
by braking.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
Changing between Cruise Control  
with/without Distance Control  
Reducing the distance  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
Safety information  
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-  
tance.  
Warning  
The system does not react to traffic driv-  
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the  
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Adjust the set  
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as  
needed.  
Increasing the distance  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-  
tance.  
Changing over the Cruise Control mode  
Switching Cruise Control without Distance  
Control off and on:  
205  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Description  
▷
▷
Press and hold this button.  
White indicator light:  
No Distance Control because acceler-  
ator pedal is being pressed.  
Press and hold this button.  
Switching on distance control:  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
Vehicle has been detected ahead of  
you.  
▷
Press the button.  
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle  
has been detected ahead of you.  
▷
Press the button.  
Indicator light flashes green:  
After changing, a Check Control message is  
displayed.  
Preceding vehicle has driven off.  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
System interrupted.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.  
Indicator light flashes gray:  
Conditions are not adequate for the  
system to work.  
The system was deactivated but ap-  
plies the brakes until you actively  
resume control by pressing on the  
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Set speed  
Some system information can also be dis-  
played in the Head-up display.  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Depending on the equipment:  
The icon is displayed when the set  
speed is reached.  
Distance information  
The icon is displayed when the dis-  
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead  
is too short.  
206  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The distance information is active in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
Merging vehicles  
▷
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control  
switched off.  
▷
Display in the Head-up display selected.  
Head-up display, refer to page 134.  
Distance too short.  
▷
▷
Speed greater than approx.  
40 mph/70 km/h.  
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly  
merges into your lane, the system may not be  
able to automatically restore the selected dis-  
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-  
lected distance in certain situations, including if  
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles  
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly  
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving  
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system  
requests that the driver intervene by braking  
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 37.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 38.  
Detection range  
Cornering  
The detection capability of the system and the  
automatic braking performance are limited.  
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be  
detected.  
When the set speed is too high for a curve,  
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves  
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a  
curve at an appropriate speed.  
Deceleration  
The system does not decelerate in the follow-  
ing situations:  
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-  
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-  
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be  
detected very late.  
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving  
road users.  
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national availability, for red traffic lights.  
▷
▷
For cross traffic.  
For oncoming traffic.  
207  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
General information  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,  
this new speed value can be applied for the  
following systems:  
▷
▷
▷
Manual Speed Limiter.  
Cruise control.  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due  
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-  
erates you may compensate for it by briefly  
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator  
pedal the system is reactivated and controls  
speed independently.  
The speed value is suggested as the new de-  
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed  
value, the corresponding system must be acti-  
vated.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Driving off  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off  
automatically; for example:  
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.  
In front of bumps in the road.  
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.  
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that  
are already recognized.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
Speed Limit Assistant  
Principle  
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the  
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-  
plied.  
208  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Icon  
Function  
Depending on the equipment version,  
the indicator light illuminates green,  
together with the icon for a speed  
control system:  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Accept suggested speed manually.  
Speed Limit Assistant is active and  
detected speed limits can be applied  
manually for the displayed system.  
Rocker switch:  
Detected change of a speed limit with  
immediate effect.  
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.  
Depending on the national-market  
version, it is possible to switch be-  
tween the units of measurement.  
Turning Speed Limit Assistant  
on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
Indicator light illuminates green: the  
detected speed limit can be applied  
with the SET button.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
After it has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
7. "Speed limits"  
Manual adoption  
A detected speed limit can be applied man-  
ually for the active driver assistance system.  
8. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits  
can be applied manually.  
When the SET icon illuminates, press  
the button.  
▷
"Show anticipation": Depending on the  
national-market version: current and up-  
coming speed limits are displayed in  
the instrument cluster without being ap-  
plied.  
Speed adjustment  
Principle  
▷
▷
"Show current limit": current speed lim-  
its are displayed without being applied  
in the instrument cluster.  
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is  
applied exactly or with a tolerance.  
"Off": depending on the national-market  
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed  
Limit Assistant will be turned off.  
General information  
You can configure a speed adaptation for all  
speed limits and an additional speed adapta-  
tion for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter when the system and a driver assistance  
system are activated.  
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-  
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or  
deactivated.  
209  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Setting the speed adjustment  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
7. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for  
the speed adaptation that affects all  
speeds.  
▷
▷
"2nd adjustment up to": activate or de-  
activate additional speed adaptation.  
"Adjust speed limits": With additional  
speed adjustment activated, set the  
tolerance for speed limits up to  
40 mph/60 km/h.  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed  
Limit Info system.  
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.  
Additional information:  
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Information,  
refer to page 197.  
▷
System limits of the sensors, refer to  
page 37.  
210  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Parking assistance systems  
General information  
The parking assistance systems include differ-  
ent individual systems. The individual systems  
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or  
reversing by providing various assistance func-  
tions, sensors, and camera views.  
Park assistance button  
Additional information:  
Sensors  
▷
▷
▷
Rearview camera, refer to page 215.  
The parking assistance systems are controlled  
by the following sensors:  
Park Distance Control, refer to page 215.  
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 218.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 219.  
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Rearview camera.  
Back-up Assistant, refer to page 222.  
Additional information:  
Safety information  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Operating concept  
Warning  
The camera-based individual systems are op-  
erated with the function bars on the control  
display. The camera views can be viewed by  
selecting the appropriate icon.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
In the Parking menu, some parking assistance  
systems can be configured individually.  
Some parking assistance systems can be  
started by voice control as needed, e.g., driving  
211  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
in/out of a parking space with the Automatic  
Parking Assistant.  
With reverse gear  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-  
play is automatically switched on if selector  
lever position R is engaged.  
Additional information:  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 54.  
With the Park Assist key  
Calling up Park menu  
Press the button.  
Via Parking Assistant button  
Display on the control display  
1.  
Press the button.  
"Settings"  
General information  
2.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the  
activated parking assistance system, the con-  
trol display will vary.  
3. Select the desired settings.  
Via iDrive  
1.  
Apps menu  
Display  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. Select the desired settings.  
Display  
Principle  
1
Toolbar, left  
With the Park Distance Control display and  
various camera views, the parking assistance  
systems help you park, maneuver, and reverse  
your vehicle.  
2
3
4
Camera image  
Vehicle top view  
Toolbar, right  
General information  
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-  
ings or a part of it is depicted.  
Toolbar, left  
Different views can be selected using the left  
toolbar depending on vehicle equipment:  
▷
"Rear view camera"  
Turning display on/off  
The view of the rearview camera is dis-  
played.  
General information  
The parking assistance systems view switches  
off automatically when driving forwards or if a  
certain distance or speed is exceeded.  
▷
"Parking sensors only"  
The Park Distance Control view is dis-  
played.  
212  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make  
parking and maneuvering easier.  
Toolbar, right  
The parking assistance functions are displayed  
in the right toolbar. The display may vary de-  
pending on vehicle equipment.  
Several additional displays can be active at the  
same time.  
▷
▷
Status of the parking assistance systems.  
"Automatic Parking"  
Turning additional displays on/off  
Functions of the Automatic Parking Assis-  
tant.  
Via Parking Assistant button  
1. Enable the camera image.  
▷
▷
"Back-Up Assistant"  
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.  
"Settings"  
2.  
"Settings"  
3. Select the desired settings.  
Via iDrive  
Settings in the Park menu.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Status of parking assistance  
systems  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
The status of active parking assistance sys-  
tems is indicated by icons in the right-hand  
toolbar.  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Parking aid lines  
No search for Automatic Parking  
Assistant offers.  
Pathway lines  
Automatic Parking Assistant has  
failed.  
Search for Automatic Parking As-  
sistant offers is active.  
Automatic Parking Assistant: if the  
icon is green, the Automatic Parking  
Assistant is active. The system as-  
sumes vehicle control.  
Back-up Assistant: if the icon is  
green, the Back-up Assistant is ac-  
tive. The system takes over the  
steering.  
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space  
required when parking and maneuvering on  
level roads.  
Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind  
the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.  
Additional displays  
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted  
to the steering movements depending on the  
steering-wheel angle.  
General information  
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-  
era image of the display of the parking assis-  
213  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Turning circle lines  
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in  
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.  
Functional limitations  
The system can be used only to a limited ex-  
tent in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
With a door open.  
With open cargo area.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed  
on the camera image together with pathway  
lines.  
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the  
camera image identify areas that are currently  
not shown such as an open door.  
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-  
sible turning circle on a level road.  
System limits  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after  
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-  
gle.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Using parking aid lines  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads to within the limits of the  
parking space.  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green pathway line covers the corre-  
sponding turning circle line.  
Obstacle marking  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Field of view  
Because of the camera angle, the areas under  
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.  
Detection of objects  
Obstacles are detected by the sensors.  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance  
Control are shown by marks in the camera im-  
age.  
214  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Objects shown on the control display may be  
closer than they appear. Do not estimate the  
distance to the objects on the control display.  
Turning the camera view off  
automatically  
The rearview camera turns off automatically  
when driving forward or when a certain dis-  
tance or speed is exceeded.  
The camera's detection range can be limited  
by protruding cargo or a rear carrier.  
Malfunction  
A camera failure is displayed on the control  
display.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
The malfunctioning camera's detection range  
is shown by the shaded area on the control  
display.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
Select the icon on the left toolbar.  
To exit the rearview camera view, select  
another camera view on the left toolbar.  
Rearview camera  
Deactivated rearview camera  
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for  
instance when the cargo area is open, the  
camera image is displayed with gray shading.  
Principle  
The rearview camera helps when reverse  
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the  
vehicle is shown on the control display.  
Additional views can be shown on the display,  
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.  
Park Distance Control  
Principle  
General information  
Park Distance Control assists with parking.  
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles  
in front of or behind the vehicle.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-  
sonic sensors can also be reported.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The cargo area is fully closed.  
▷
The camera area is clean and clear.  
General information  
The range of the system, depending on obsta-  
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.  
6 ft/2 m.  
Turning the rearview camera on/off  
Turning the camera view on  
automatically  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the  
rearview camera is automatically switched on  
if selector lever position R is engaged.  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-  
pending collision at a distance to the object of  
approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is issued as early as a distance to the  
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
215  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance  
depends on the situation in question.  
Safety information  
The automatic activation of detected obstacles  
can be activated or deactivated.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. "Automatic PDC activation"  
Turning off the system automatically  
When driving forward, the system turns off au-  
tomatically as needed when a certain distance  
or speed is exceeded.  
Warning  
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance  
Control is activated, the warning can be de-  
layed due to physical circumstances. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid  
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control  
is not yet active.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Press the button.  
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.  
Off: the LED goes out.  
If the system is manually switched on when  
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview  
camera image is displayed.  
Sensors  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system cannot be turned off manually when  
the reverse gear is engaged.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
Acoustic warning  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
General information  
Turning Park Distance Control  
on/off  
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle  
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object  
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a  
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.  
Turning on the system automatically  
The system switches on automatically in the  
following situations:  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.  
▷
When drive-ready state is switched on  
when selector lever position R is engaged.  
When the distance to a detected object is less  
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is  
sounded.  
▷
While approaching detected obstacles  
if the speed is lower than approx.  
216  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
When there are objects in front of and behind  
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance  
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating  
continuous tone will sound between the front  
and rear speakers.  
If the vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic  
Warning: the display also warns the driver of  
vehicles approaching from behind.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone  
are turned off when selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
Display  
Depending on national-market version, the in-  
termittent tones are switched off after a short  
time when the vehicle is stationary.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings  
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-  
hind the vehicle.  
If an object approaches when the vehicle is  
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.  
Adjusting the volume  
The volume of the acoustic warning can be  
adjusted.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. "PDC signal volume"  
7. Set the desired value.  
Example display of warnings behind the vehi-  
cle.  
Visual warning  
General information  
The approach to an object is displayed on the  
control display as soon as the system is acti-  
vated.  
Example display of warnings next to the vehi-  
cle.  
Objects that are farther away are already dis-  
played before a signal sounds.  
▷
▷
▷
Gray shaded area: Sensor detection range.  
No obstacles were detected within detec-  
tion range.  
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning  
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown  
for a better estimation of the space required.  
Colored marks in shaded area: Obstacles  
have been detected within the detection  
range.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor  
detection range is shown by the shaded, ring-  
shaped area. Green, yellow, and red markings  
indicate when obstacles are detected within  
the detection range.  
Shaded area interrupted: the area next to  
the vehicle has not yet been detected.  
217  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-  
vented under all circumstances.  
General information  
The function for protecting the vehicle sides  
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-  
viously detected by the sensors when passing  
by.  
The function is available below walking speed  
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.  
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the  
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not  
performed.  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-  
ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are  
hidden after a certain time. The area on the  
side of the vehicle must be newly captured.  
After emergency braking to a stop, further  
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-  
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly  
press the accelerator pedal and release as  
needed.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,  
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-  
ble at any time.  
Unwarranted warnings  
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-  
ranted warnings.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance  
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-  
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Malfunction  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
An icon is displayed on the control dis-  
play.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: The  
sensor detection range may not be shown on  
the control display.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the  
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-  
ter or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Active Park Distance Control  
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Principle  
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-  
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute  
risk of collision.  
218  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Deactivating Active Park Distance  
Control temporarily  
Automatic Parking Assistant  
After emergency braking, the function can be  
temporarily deactivated on the control display.  
A corresponding message is displayed.  
Principle  
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support  
when parallel parking and parking transverse  
to the road.  
1. "Configure"  
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of  
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-  
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the  
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The  
system status is displayed.  
2. "Deactivate temporarily"  
During continued driving in this surrounding  
situation, no further emergency braking will  
occur.  
The function is automatically reactivated when  
Park Distance Control is switched on again.  
Manual transmission: The system calculates  
the best possible parking line for driving into  
parking spaces, and takes control of steering  
while parking.  
Settings  
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle  
will be protected by the system.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission: The system  
calculates the best possible parking line for  
driving into parking spaces, and takes control  
of the vehicle while parking.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The operating principle and operation of the  
system is divided into the following steps:  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.  
Turning on.  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Parking.  
The parking manoeuver while parking is per-  
formed automatically.  
Display  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a corresponding  
message.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
System limits  
Safety information  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
219  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Warning  
Functional requirements  
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto  
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appro-  
priate  
Measurement of parking spaces  
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-  
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.  
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-  
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Parking methods  
Park Assist supports the following functions:  
Suitable parking space  
Longitudinal parking:  
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
Minimum length of gap between two ob-  
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.  
2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Perpendicular parking:  
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the  
road.  
Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle  
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.  
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces  
must be estimated by the driver. Due to  
technical limitations, the system is only able  
to approximate the depth of perpendicular  
parking spaces.  
Parking operation  
▷
Doors and cargo area are closed.  
Perpendicular parking: reverse parking per-  
pendicular to the road.  
▷
M Steptronic Sport transmission: driver’s  
seat belt is fastened.  
Sensors  
Displays  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled  
by the following sensors:  
The current status of the parking space search  
is displayed in the right toolbar.  
220  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
If a parallel or perpendicular parking space is  
clearly detected, the system automatically ad-  
justs to the suitable parking method. If there  
are parking spaces for parallel or perpendicular  
parking, both parking spaces are shown on the  
control display. The parking direction can be  
selected by selecting the parking space.  
tomatic steering operation after changing  
gear on the stationary vehicle.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission: the speed  
can be reduced using the brake. Other in-  
terventions will cancel the system. At the  
end of the parking operation, selector lever  
position P is set.  
Depending on national-market version, an  
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for  
Park Distance Control.  
Turning the signal tone on/off  
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces  
can be turned on and off.  
The end of the parking operation is indi-  
cated on the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. "Sound when available"  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant manually  
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-  
celed manually at any time, e.g.:  
Parking using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
▷
Press the button.  
1. For the parking space search when driving  
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to  
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of  
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
▷
"Automatic Parking": select the icon on  
the control display.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant automatically  
The parking space search is activated.  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
2. Press the  
gear.  
button or engage reverse  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
▷
▷
Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.  
The status of the parking space search and  
possible parking spaces are displayed on  
the control display.  
When there are obstacles that are hard to  
overcome such as curbs.  
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-  
pear.  
3. Select suggested parking method.  
Green: the system takes control of the  
parking operation.  
With insufficient distances, which are indi-  
cated by Park Distance Control.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Manual transmission: to achieve the best  
possible parking position, wait for the au-  
221  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When a maximum number of parking at-  
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-  
ceeded.  
▷
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
For diagonal parking spaces.  
For parking spaces that are only marked  
with lines on the ground. The system ori-  
ents itself according to objects.  
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
Manual transmission:  
▷
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered  
parking spaces with automatic locking  
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-  
tems.  
▷
▷
▷
If a gear is selected that does not match the  
instruction on the control display.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
6 mph/10 km/h.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
The turn signal opposite to the desired  
parking side is switched on.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With open cargo area.  
With the doors open.  
▷
▷
▷
On slippery ground.  
When setting the parking brake.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
▷
▷
The brake pedal remains depressed for  
longer while the vehicle is at a standstill.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.  
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
Parking spaces that are not suitable may  
be detected or suitable parking spaces may  
not be detected at all.  
Continuing the parking operation  
An interrupted parking operation can be con-  
tinued, if needed.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Restart the Automatic Parking Assistant and  
follow the instructions on the control display.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant may not be  
operational. Have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Back-up assistant  
No parking assistance  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-  
fer assistance in the following situations:  
Principle  
The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,  
e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-  
ing or road situations.  
222  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Driving in reverse with automated  
steering  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
The vehicle stores the driving movements of  
the last distance covered. This stored distance  
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-  
ing.  
2.  
3.  
With the vehicle at a standstill, press  
button or engage reverse gear.  
The system takes over the steering. The driver  
must control the speed using the accelerator  
and brake pedals.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
A maximum of 164 ft/50 m are stored.  
"Back-Up Assistant"  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play where required.  
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and  
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-  
tor pedal and the brake.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Green: the system takes control of  
steering.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-  
cle's surroundings.  
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and  
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the  
instructions for Park Distance Control.  
5. Right before the end of the stored distance  
covered, a signal tone will sound and a  
message is displayed.  
Stop no later than when normal road traffic  
is reached and take control of the vehicle  
such as by shifting to forward gear.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto  
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appro-  
priate  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
manually  
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-  
tant can be canceled manually:  
▷
▷
Via touchscreen:  
"Back-Up Assistant"  
Press the button.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store  
the distance covered.  
To store the distance covered, do not drive  
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
Dynamic Stability Control is activated.  
223  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
▷
▷
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-  
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.  
When shifting from reverse gear to another  
selector lever position.  
Greatly deviating conditions when storing  
and driving the route, for instance other  
tires or changed ambient conditions like  
weather.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
After an extended period of time when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
When exiting the stored lane when revers-  
ing, for instance with maximum steering-  
wheel angle.  
▷
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
▷
▷
In case of a slippery surface.  
When the vehicle is rolling such as on a  
slope.  
▷
▷
In case of changed ambient conditions.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
6 mph/9 km/h.  
System limits  
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is  
limited to approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.  
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.  
4 mph/7 km/h.  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the  
function is interrupted.  
▷
After driving a stored distance covered with  
major steering-wheel angles, the function  
of the system will be limited for the return  
trip.  
Different influences can lead to side deviations  
when driving the stored distance covered in re-  
verse. For example, this includes the following  
factors:  
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is  
stationary while storing the distance cov-  
ered.  
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance  
covered.  
224  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
Programs  
Vehicle features and options  
Program  
Damping settings  
Comfort-oriented.  
Balanced out.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
"COMFORT"  
"SPORT"  
Additional information:  
"SPORT PLUS"  
Consistently sporty.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Selecting a program  
Adaptive M chassis  
Using the button  
Press the button and select the desired  
program on the control display.  
Principle  
By adjusting the dampers, the system reduces  
movement of the vehicle body when driving in  
a sporty way or on uneven roads.  
Via iDrive  
Adaptive M running gear settings can be con-  
figured in M Setup.  
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv-  
ing comfort depending on the road condition  
and driving style.  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 183.  
Overview  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Button in the vehicle  
When the display for M Setup is acti-  
vated in the instrument cluster, the se-  
lected program is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 144  
SETUP  
225  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Icon  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
Fresh air.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Air flow.  
Additional information:  
Air distribution.  
SYNC program.  
Seat heating.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Climate control  
Overview  
Functions in the Climate menu  
Steering wheel heating.  
Icon  
Function  
Turn the climate control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Buttons, automatic climate control  
Automatic program.  
Temperature.  
Air conditioning.  
Maximum cooling.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Icon  
Function  
Defrost function.  
Rear window defroster.  
Automatic recirculated-air con-  
trol.  
Calling up climate control functions  
The Climate menu can be accessed via iDrive:  
226  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu on  
the menu bar.  
Automatic program  
Principle  
Or:  
1.  
The automatic program ensures a comforta-  
ble climate, which can be modified with the  
desired temperature and individual settings.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Climate control"  
The automatic program cools, ventilates or  
heats the vehicle interior automatically.  
Turning the air conditioning system  
on/off  
The climate control system can be turned on or  
off via iDrive.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the automatic  
program provides the best possible settings  
for climate control functions depending on  
the outside temperature, interior temperature,  
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-  
perature setting:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Air flow.  
2.  
Tap the power button.  
Air distribution.  
Temperature.  
Seat heating.  
The entire climate control system is turned on  
or off with the last settings applied.  
When the air conditioning system is turned  
on, individual climate control functions can be  
turned off.  
The automatic program takes seat occupancy  
into account, regulating the climate in an en-  
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-  
cupants.  
Settings  
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-  
trols the automatic program in order to prevent  
window condensation to the extent possible.  
You can configure individual settings for cli-  
mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:  
▷
▷
Intensity of seat heating.  
Pre-ventilation.  
Overview  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings" or "General settings"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
1
Settings  
2
3
Air flow intensity  
Climate control functions bar  
227  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The red or blue bar next to the temperature  
display indicates the progress of heating or  
cooling.  
4
5
Temperature  
Seat heating  
The desired interior temperature is reached  
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.  
Turning the automatic program  
on/off  
The AUTO program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive.  
Active climate control functions, e.g., seat  
heating, are indicated by the icons on the  
menu bar.  
Temperature  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Principle  
The automatic climate control cools or heats  
to the configured temperature and then keeps  
the temperature constant.  
2.  
Tap the AUTO program button.  
Setting the intensity  
When the automatic program is activated,  
the intensity of individual climate control func-  
tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-  
ally.  
General information  
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-  
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-  
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-  
just the set temperature.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Setting the temperature  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Each level has a specific control range of the  
intensity.  
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-  
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is  
not necessary to manually change the desired  
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.  
The individually selected settings of the cli-  
mate control functions are stored and auto-  
matically set up again such as after the vehicle  
is started again.  
You can set the desired temperature for driver  
and front passenger individually on the menu  
bar.  
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.  
Lower the temperature.  
Display  
The indicator on the menu bar provides infor-  
mation about the temperature difference be-  
tween the configured desired temperature and  
current interior temperature.  
228  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Tap up arrow: Increase air flow.  
Tap down arrow: Reduce air flow.  
Upper body temperature  
General information  
The air temperature in the upper body area  
can be adjusted.  
Air distribution settings  
This does not change the set interior tempera-  
ture for the driver and front passenger.  
Principle  
In manual mode, the air distribution can be  
adjusted as needed.  
Adjusting the upper body temperature  
Adjusting the air distribution  
The air distribution can be set via iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Temperature adjustment upper body"  
4. Increase or decrease temperature.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the air distribution icon on the  
climate control functions bar.  
3. Select the desired setting:  
Air flow  
Principle  
The air flow generated by the blower can be  
adjusted as needed.  
▷
▷
▷
Aim the air flow into the footwell, ar-  
row 1.  
Aim the air flow toward the upper body  
area, arrow 2.  
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the  
vehicle battery.  
Aim the air flow at the windshield , ar-  
row 3.  
Adjusting the air flow  
The air flow can be set via iDrive.  
The selected air distribution is displayed.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Select the desired setting.  
Automatic program:  
▷
Tap the large air flow icon to increase the  
air flow.  
▷
Tap the small air flow icon to reduce the air  
flow.  
Manual mode:  
229  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement  
The following functional requirements must be  
met for maximum cooling:  
Air conditioning  
Principle  
▷
The outside temperature is higher than ap-  
prox. 32℉ / 0℃.  
With the climate control function, the air inside  
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then  
warmed again depending on the temperature  
settings.  
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Turning maximum cooling on/off  
Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via  
iDrive:  
Functional requirement  
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
Switching the cooling function on/off  
The air conditioning can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the maximum cooling button.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
area. Open the vents.  
2.  
Tap the air conditioning button.  
Air recirculation mode  
In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-  
tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid  
window condensation.  
Principle  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-  
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-  
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The  
system then recirculates the interior air.  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
the side windows may fog up briefly when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
When using the cooling mode, condensation  
that will exit below the vehicle.  
In automatic recirculated-air control mode, out-  
side air is fed in or the interior air recirculated  
depending on the outside air quality.  
Maximum cooling  
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside  
air is directed into the interior.  
Principle  
General information  
If there is window condensation, turn off the air  
recirculation.  
Maximum cooling lets you cool the vehicle in-  
terior quickly and effectively.  
The lowest temperature and the maximum air  
flow are set automatically.  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
The function is automatically activated in the  
rear when the SYNC program is turned on.  
230  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Turning air recirculation on/off  
Air recirculation mode can be switched on or  
off via iDrive:  
General information  
The following settings can be applied:  
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Air distribution.  
Automatic program.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Turning the SYNC program on/off  
The SYNC program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
2. The current operating mode is displayed on  
the climate control functions bar. Tap the  
button until the desired operating mode is  
set.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
▷
▷
▷
Recirculating air.  
Fresh air.  
2.  
Tap the SYNC program button.  
If the settings on the front passenger side are  
changed, the program turns off automatically.  
Automatic air recirculation.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the air recir-  
culation turns off automatically after some time  
based on the ambient conditions in order to  
prevent condensation.  
Defrost function  
Principle  
With the defrost function, ice and condensation  
are quickly removed from the windshield and  
the front side windows.  
SYNC program  
Principle  
The air flow and air temperature are automati-  
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-  
densation.  
If the SYNC program is activated, the settings  
for the driver's side are transferred to the pas-  
senger's side and to the rear.  
The air distribution is directed toward the  
windshield and front side windows.  
For improved comfort, when the SYNC pro-  
gram is deactivated, the following settings are  
adjusted automatically in the automatic pro-  
gram depending on seat occupancy:  
If there is window condensation, turn on the  
automatic program to take advantage of the  
condensation sensor.  
▷
If the front passenger seat is unoccupied,  
the settings for the driver's side are applied  
to the front passenger side.  
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear  
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-  
vide maximum performance.  
▷
If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the  
default settings for the rear are applied.  
Turning the defrost function on/off  
When the seat is occupied again, the most re-  
cent settings are reapplied.  
Press the defrost button on the instru-  
ment panel.  
231  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The LED of the button is illuminated when the  
system is switched on.  
Adjusting seat heating  
Automatic program  
Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-  
shield and front side windows.  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As  
you drive, the heater output is automatically  
adjusted according to your set intensity.  
Rear window defroster  
Adjusting seat heating manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
Principle  
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-  
densation are quickly removed from the rear  
window.  
Functional requirement  
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
Turning the rear window defroster  
on/off  
Press the rear window heating button  
on the instrument panel.  
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
The LED in the button illuminates  
when the rear window heating is turned on.  
2.  
Press the seat heating button re-  
peatedly until the desired level is selected,  
arrow 2.  
The rear window defroster switches off auto-  
matically after a certain period of time.  
Seat heating  
Steering wheel heating  
Principle  
The system heats the seats as necessary.  
Principle  
The system heats the steering wheel as nec-  
essary.  
General information  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-  
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions  
are turned on automatically with the tempera-  
ture that was last set.  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
Automatic program  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of steering wheel heating can be ad-  
justed. As you drive, the heater output is auto-  
matically adjusted according to your set inten-  
sity.  
232  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
manually  
Front ventilation  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
Setting the air flow direction and air volume at  
the vent.  
▷
Changing the air flow direction: press the  
button in the desired air flow direction.  
1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
▷
Changing the air volume:  
▷
Turn the knob clockwise: increase the  
air volume.  
2.  
Press the steering wheel heating  
button repeatedly until the desired level is  
selected, arrow 2.  
▷
Turn the knob counterclockwise to de-  
crease the air volume.  
Ventilation in the rear  
Ventilation  
Principle  
The ventilation system offers individual adjust-  
ment ranges for direct/indirect ventilation in or-  
der to optimize the flow of air within the vehi-  
cle.  
General information  
Open the air vents and position them to ensure  
effective air conditioning.  
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-  
rows 1.  
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-  
ing on the set desired temperature.  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.  
Setting the ventilation  
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the  
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-  
sengers.  
233  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The activation time is determined based on  
the outside temperature. The system promptly  
switches on before the selected departure  
time.  
Air quality  
General information  
The air quality in the interior is improved by the  
following components:  
The system switches off automatically after a  
certain period of time. The system continues to  
run for some time after being switched off.  
▷
▷
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.  
Interior filter.  
Functional requirements  
Air conditioning system to control the  
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air  
mode.  
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.  
▷
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.  
▷
Pre-ventilation.  
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle  
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the  
maximum activation time to save the vehi-  
cle battery. The system will be available  
again after the engine is started or after a  
short trip.  
Interior filter  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
▷
▷
Time and date are set correctly.  
The ventilation air vents are open.  
Depending on the equipment:  
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-  
flowing air.  
Switching pre-ventilation on/off  
▷
▷
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.  
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens  
are filtered.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
having the interior filter changed during vehicle  
maintenance.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Departure time  
Pre-ventilation  
General information  
Different departure times can be set to ensure  
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-  
cle at the time of departure.  
Principle  
The car's interior can be cooled or heated  
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-  
pending on set temperature and ambient tem-  
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos-  
sibly heated using the residual engine heat.  
▷
One-time departure time: the time can be  
set.  
The system is switched on once.  
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week can be set.  
General information  
The system can be switched on and off directly  
or via a preset departure time.  
234  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
On the desired weekdays, the system will  
be switched on before the set departure  
time.  
Activating with My BMW App  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW  
App with remote functionality can be used to  
turn on precooling at a preset departure time  
or immediately.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Activate departure times.  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-  
tween setting and activating the departure  
time and the planned departure time to allow a  
sufficient period of time for the air conditioning.  
Pre-conditioning through  
Remote Engine Start  
Principle  
Setting the departure time  
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-  
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable  
temperature. The system automatically cools,  
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-  
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may  
be removed more easily.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
The system starts the engine automatically  
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Select the desired departure time.  
6. Set the desired departure time.  
7. Select day of the week, if needed.  
Safety information  
DANGER  
Activating the departure time  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation  
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-  
lute the area in and around the vehicle or  
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases  
contain pollutants which are colorless and  
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-  
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on  
pre-conditioning in enclosed areas or areas  
with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed  
garages.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
Display on the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
Icon illuminates: a depar-  
ture time is activated.  
Warning  
Icon flashes: pre-ventila-  
tion is switched on.  
When pre-conditioning is in operation, high  
temperatures can occur underneath the  
body, for instance caused by the exhaust  
system. If combustible materials such as  
235  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
leaves or grass come in contact with hot  
parts of the exhaust system, these materials  
can ignite. There is a risk of fire, injury, and  
property damage. Make sure that no com-  
bustible materials can come in contact with  
hot vehicle parts during pre-conditioning, e.g.  
leaves, grass, natural gas, gasoline, oil or  
other combustible objects.  
The system can be switched on a maximum of  
two times in a row.  
The system will be available again as soon  
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-  
tivated again.  
Switching on via iDrive  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.  
Battery is sufficiently charged.  
The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.  
Hood is closed.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Start now"  
Switching on/off via vehicle key  
The system can be switched on and off using  
the vehicle key.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
▷
Air vents are opened.  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
three times within 1 second.  
Enabling the automatic engine start  
function  
The automatic engine start must be enabled  
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-  
gine cannot switch on automatically to clima-  
tize the car's interior.  
After operating the vehicle key, it takes  
approx. 3 seconds for the engine to switch on.  
To switch off the system, press the button  
again three times.  
Turning off with the Start/Stop button  
This system can be turned off directly by push-  
ing the Start/Stop button without depressing  
the brake pedal.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
Air conditioning for departure time  
4. "Remote Engine Start"  
5. "Start engine for climate control"  
6. Confirm the disclaimer.  
General information  
Scheduled departure times can be set up in  
the system to ensure a comfortable interior  
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-  
ture.  
Turning on/turning off the pre-  
conditioning  
▷
One-time departure time: the time of the  
scheduled departure can be set.  
General information  
The system switches off automatically after  
max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.  
236  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The system is switched on once.  
Display  
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week of the scheduled departure can  
be set.  
In the instrument cluster:  
The engine runs for the purpose  
of operating the pre-condition-  
ing. The vehicle is not ready to  
drive.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Activate departure times.  
Icon  
Description  
The system is activated automatically a few  
minutes before the set departure time. The  
system remains switched on for a short time  
after the set departure time.  
Icon on the instrument  
panel.  
Icon illuminates: a depar-  
ture time is activated.  
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can  
only be activated once for the departure time.  
Icon flashes: pre-condition-  
ing is switched on.  
The system will be available again as soon  
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-  
tivated again.  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
The activation of the system is confirmed by  
flashing twice.  
Observe the information about the intended  
use of the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 9.  
The parking lights are switched on as long as  
the system is switched on.  
Setting the departure time  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Set the departure time.  
6. Select day of the week, if needed.  
Activating the departure time  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
237  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
risk of property damage. Make sure that the  
travel path of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also fol-  
low the safety information for the hand-held  
transmitter.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Compatibility  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
If this icon is printed on the packaging  
or in the operating instructions of the  
remote-controlled system, the system  
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-  
versal remote control.  
Integrated universal remote  
control  
Additional questions are answered by:  
Principle  
▷
An authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
The integrated universal remote control in the  
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled  
systems such as garage door openers, alarm  
systems or locking systems.  
▷
on the Internet.  
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex  
Corporation.  
For any additional questions, contact an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
General information  
The integrated universal remote control re-  
places up to three different hand-held trans-  
mitters. To operate the remote control, the  
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-  
grammed with the desired functions.  
Operating elements on the interior  
mirror  
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored  
functions for the sake of security.  
If possible, do not install the antenna of the  
remote-controlled system near metal objects  
to ensure the best possible operation.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.  
LED, arrow 2.  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control  
such as the garage door may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in  
a garage door. There is a risk of injury and  
Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-  
trolled system, arrow 3.  
238  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the button on the interior  
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform  
this procedure three times.  
Programming the integrated  
universal remote control  
If the integrated universal remote con-  
trol remains nonoperational, continue  
with the special features for rolling code  
radio systems.  
Functional requirement  
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must  
be fully charged at the time of programming  
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated  
universal remote control.  
▷
LED does not illuminate green after  
60 seconds: programming not com-  
pleted.  
Programming individual buttons  
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-  
controlled system.  
Repeat steps 3 to 5.  
Special feature of the rolling code  
wireless system  
For systems with a rolling code radio system,  
the integrated universal remote control and the  
system also have to be synchronized.  
2. Turn on standby state.  
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:  
▷
Program available button:  
Press the button.  
▷
Program already assigned button:  
Refer to information on synchronization in the  
operating instructions of the remote-controlled  
system.  
Press and hold the button for approx.  
20 seconds.  
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly  
begin flashing orange.  
1. Program the desired button on the interior  
mirror.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the  
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to  
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons  
on the interior mirror.  
2. Locate and press the synchronizing button  
on the remote-controlled system such as  
on the garage door.  
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next  
step.  
The required distance depends on the  
hand-held transmitter.  
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a  
second person.  
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held  
transmitter.  
3. Press and hold the programmed button on  
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the  
interior mirror button and repeatedly press  
and release the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton for 2 seconds.  
If necessary, repeat this step up to three  
times in order to end synchronization. Once  
synchronization is complete, the program-  
med function will be carried out.  
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:  
Operation  
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-  
tem can be operated with the button on the  
interior mirror.  
▷
The LED illuminates green: program-  
ming completed.  
Release button.  
▷
The LED flashes green rapidly: the  
hand-held transmitter was detected but  
programming is not complete.  
239  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the desired button of the re-  
mote-controlled system within range until the  
function is triggered.  
Sockets  
Principle  
The socket can be used for electronic devi-  
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously  
illuminated green during the transmission of  
the radio signal.  
Deleting a button assignment  
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-  
vidually.  
General information  
The total load of all sockets must not exceed  
140 watts at 12 volts.  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on  
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-  
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green  
rapidly.  
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable  
connectors.  
Safety information  
All stored button assignments will be deleted.  
Warning  
Sun visor  
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of  
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-  
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or  
be thrown around in the car's interior while  
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of property damage. Make sure that devices  
and cables are not in the airbag's area of  
unfolding.  
Glare shield  
Fold the sun visor down or up.  
Glare shield from the side  
Folding the sun visor out  
1. Fold the sun visor down.  
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-  
ward the side window.  
Warning  
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-  
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the  
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V  
electrical system. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Only connect  
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the  
jump-start terminals in the engine compart-  
ment.  
3. Shift it back to the desired position.  
Folding the sun visor in  
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun  
visor.  
Vanity mirror  
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-  
hind a cover.  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
240  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
and risk of property damage. Make sure to  
prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Make sure to  
prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
Front center console  
1. Press on the cover.  
In the center armrest  
2. A socket is located between the cup hold-  
ers. Detach the cover.  
A USB port is located in the center armrest.  
Properties:  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: max. 3 A.  
USB port  
In the front center console  
General information  
Follow the information regarding the connec-  
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the  
section on USB connections.  
NOTICE  
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g.,  
large USB connectors, may block or damage  
the cover when it is being opened or closed.  
There is a risk of property damage. Make  
sure that the area of movement of the cover  
is clear while opening and closing it.  
Additional information:  
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-  
igation, Entertainment, Communication;  
241  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Warning  
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the  
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on  
the tray together with the device can become  
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or  
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-  
tion correctly when placed together on the  
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. When charging  
mobile devices, make sure there are no ob-  
jects on the tray together with the device.  
If necessary, push on the cover.  
Overview  
Tray in the center console:  
A USB port is located in the center console.  
Properties:  
▷
▷
USB port Type A.  
For charging mobile devices and for data  
transfer.  
▷
Charge current: max. 1.5 A.  
1
LED  
Wireless charging tray  
2
Storage area  
Principle  
Functional requirements  
The wireless charging tray is used to wirelessly  
charge Qi-certified smartphones.  
▷
The smartphone to be charged must be Qi-  
certified.  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
General information  
Smartphone must not exceed maximum di-  
mensions of approx. 6.0 x 3.1 x 0.7 in/154.5  
x 80 x 18 mm.  
When inserting the smartphone to be charged,  
make sure that there is nothing between the  
smartphone to be charged and the wireless  
charging tray.  
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-  
able for wireless charging.  
The charging process is shown by the  
charge indicator on the control display.  
The smartphone to be charged is located  
in the center of the tray. The smartphone  
display is facing up.  
242  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Inserting a smartphone  
1. Open the tray cover.  
System limits  
The charge current may be reduced or charg-  
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-  
less charging tray in the following situations:  
2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the  
tray, with the display facing up.  
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the tray  
and smartphone.  
3. Close the tray cover.  
If there are objects between the smart-  
phone and wireless charging tray.  
LED displays  
Color Meaning  
If storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic  
stripes, or cards for signal transmission, are  
located between the smartphone and wire-  
less charging tray.  
Blue  
Smartphone is charging.  
The blue LED continues to illumi-  
nate when the Qi-capable smart-  
phone is fully charged.  
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that  
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm  
Or-  
Smartphone is not charging.  
ange  
Due to protective sleeves and covers made  
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic  
parts.  
Temperature on the smartphone  
may be too high, or foreign object  
may be in charging tray.  
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for the smartphone,  
e.g., holders.  
Red  
Smartphone is not charging.  
Contact an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
By configuring the smartphone settings,  
e.g., for charging. Follow the instructions  
given on the control display and smart-  
phone, as applicable.  
Forgotten warning  
General information  
A warning may be issued if a Qi-certified  
smartphone was forgotten in the wireless  
charging tray when leaving the vehicle.  
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster.  
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Wireless charging tray"  
5. "Mobile phone reminder"  
243  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can  
damage the dashboard. Attached objects  
could come loose. There is a risk of injury and  
risk of property damage. Do not use anti-slip  
pads.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Glove compartment  
Safety information  
Opening the glove compartment  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Pull the handle.  
Warning  
Closing the glove compartment  
Open flaps of the storage compartments,  
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,  
protrude into the interior when folded open  
and may be in the way of an airbag that  
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-  
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-  
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in  
the event of an accident or when braking or  
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk  
of injury. Always close storage compartments  
immediately after use.  
Fold the lid closed.  
244  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Fold-out compartment  
Storage tray in center  
console  
Opening the fold-out compartment  
Opening the storage compartment  
Press the button and open the cover.  
Press on the cover.  
Storage compartments in  
the doors  
Closing the storage compartment  
Pull the cover on the handle back.  
General information  
There are storage compartments in the doors.  
Front center armrest  
Safety information  
General information  
A storage compartment is located in the center  
armrest between the seats.  
Warning  
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or  
glasses can break in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-  
ken glass can be scattered in the car's in-  
terior. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Do not use any breakable  
objects while driving. Only stow breakable  
objects in closed storage compartments.  
Opening the center armrest  
Press the button.  
Closing the center armrest  
Press the lid down until it engages.  
245  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Front cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury and risk of property  
damage. Do not force objects into the cup  
holder. Make sure that drink containers are  
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-  
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-  
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do  
not transport hot beverages.  
Two cup holders are located in the center con-  
sole.  
Closing the cup holder  
Pull the cover on the handle back.  
Coat hooks  
General information  
The coat hooks are located on the door pillar in  
the rear.  
Opening the cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-  
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. When  
suspending clothing articles from the coat  
hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the  
driver's view.  
Press on the cover.  
Warning  
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a  
risk of objects flying about during braking and  
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Only hang light-  
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,  
from the coat hooks.  
246  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in  
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-  
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of property damage. Stow and secure objects  
and cargo properly.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Loading  
NOTICE  
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.  
There is a risk of property damage. Make  
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.  
Safety information  
Warning  
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the  
tires, damage them internally and cause  
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-  
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-  
ducing directional stability, lengthening the  
braking distances and changing the steering  
response. There is a risk of accident, injury,  
and property damage. Pay attention to the  
permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires  
and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle  
weight.  
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the  
vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers that will be riding in  
the vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-  
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount  
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five  
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the  
amount of available cargo and luggage  
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x  
150) = 650 lbs).  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely exceed the  
247  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear  
seat is not occupied, secure each of the  
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.  
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load  
from your trailer will be transferred to the  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine  
how this reduces the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.  
Lashing eyes in the cargo  
area  
Payload  
General information  
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo  
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw  
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.  
Overview  
The maximum payload is the sum of the  
weight of the occupants and the cargo.  
The greater the weight of the occupants, the  
less cargo that can be transported.  
Stowing and securing cargo  
The lashing eyes are located in the cargo area.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the  
cargo.  
Multifunction hook  
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of  
the backrests.  
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests  
to stow large cargo.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, a multifunction  
hook is located on the left and right side in the  
cargo area.  
Fasten the aids for securing the load to the  
lashing eyes in the cargo area.  
Small and light cargo: secure with tension-  
ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-  
gage compartment net.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo  
straps.  
Warning  
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can  
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-  
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Only hang lightweight objects from the multi-  
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-  
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the  
rear seat backrests.  
▷
Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as  
possible, directly behind and at the bottom  
248  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
function hooks. Heavy luggage in the cargo  
area must be properly secured.  
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat  
backrest is locked after folding it back.  
Warning  
Net  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the  
left side.  
Through-loading system  
Principle  
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding  
down the rear seat backrests.  
General information  
Folding down the rear seat backrest  
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of  
40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and  
the center section can be folded down sepa-  
rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded  
down together with the center section.  
From the cargo area  
The rear seat backrests can be folded down  
from the cargo area. The center section can be  
separately folded down from the rear.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area  
to release the rear seat backrest.  
Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts  
jammed when folding down the rear seat  
backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the area of  
movement of the rear seat backrest including  
head restraint is clear when folding down.  
▷
Left lever: fold down the left and middle  
rear seat backrest.  
▷
Right lever: fold down the right rear seat  
backrest.  
Folding back the rear seat backrest  
Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-  
tion and engage it.  
Warning  
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-  
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s  
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There  
249  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Folding down middle section  
1. Fold down the center head restraint.  
2. Pull lever and fold the center section for-  
ward.  
250  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
251  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B47790 - VI/24  

Related Topics

Dashboard
Sensors of the vehicle
Operating state of the vehicle
BMW iDrive
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Personal settings
Opening and closing
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Light and view
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driver assistance systems
Parking
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
Cargo area

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
BMW
Citroen
Ford
Honda
Peugeot

Latest Owner Manuals

Fourth Generation (2021-2026) Skoda Fabia 4 Door Fourth Generation (2021-2026) Skoda Fabia 4 Door
Second Generation (2013-2019) Hyundai I10 4 Door Second Generation (2013-2019) Hyundai I10 4 Door
First Generation (2007-2012) Hyundai I10 4 Door First Generation (2007-2012) Hyundai I10 4 Door
Second Generation (2022-2026) Volvo XC40 SUV Second Generation (2022-2026) Volvo XC40 SUV
Fifth Generation (2023-2026) Toyota Prius 4 Door Fifth Generation (2023-2026) Toyota Prius 4 Door
Fourth Generation (2016-2022) Toyota Prius 4 Door Fourth Generation (2016-2022) Toyota Prius 4 Door
→